<?xml version="1.0"?>
<feed xmlns="http://www.w3.org/2005/Atom" xml:lang="en">
	<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marycooch</id>
	<title>MoodleDocs - User contributions [en]</title>
	<link rel="self" type="application/atom+xml" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/api.php?action=feedcontributions&amp;feedformat=atom&amp;user=Marycooch"/>
	<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/Special:Contributions/Marycooch"/>
	<updated>2026-05-17T08:03:02Z</updated>
	<subtitle>User contributions</subtitle>
	<generator>MediaWiki 1.43.5</generator>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Performance_overview&amp;diff=108116</id>
		<title>Performance overview</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Performance_overview&amp;diff=108116"/>
		<updated>2015-02-25T10:50:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: updating&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Performance}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The performance overview report in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Reports &amp;gt; Performance overview&#039;&#039; lists issues which may affect performance of the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:performance overview.png|thumb|400px|center|Performance overview report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each of the issues, it is possible to edit the setting by clicking the icon and either enable or disable it. Reasons are given for keeping the settings as defaut and the consequences of changing them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* MDL-35716 for discussion of items in the report&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Vista general sobre desempeño]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Manual_enrolment&amp;diff=108115</id>
		<title>Manual enrolment</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Manual_enrolment&amp;diff=108115"/>
		<updated>2015-02-25T10:29:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: exact matches listed first&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Enrolment}}&lt;br /&gt;
The manual enrolments plugin allows users to be enrolled manually via a link in the course administration settings. The plugin has to be enabled by the site administrator (see [[Enrolment plugins]]) and should normally be enabled as certain other enrolment plugins, such as self enrolment, require it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Course settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Checking you have manual enrolment in your course===&lt;br /&gt;
*In a course, go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure Manual enrolments has its &amp;quot;eye&amp;quot; opened.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Manualenrolments.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editing manual enrolment settings===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Managers (and any other users with the capability [[Capabilities/enrol/manual:config|enrol/manual:config]]) can edit the manual enrolment method in the course and set the default enrolment period and default role in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:enrolmenexpirynotification.png|thumb|The manual enrolment screen (Click to enlarge)]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible also for students and/or teachers to be notified when enrolments expire by selecting either &amp;quot;Enroller only&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Enroller and enrolled user&amp;quot; from the dropdown &amp;quot;Notify before enrolment expires&amp;quot; and a time in &amp;quot;Notification threshold&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enrolling users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Method 1&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Enrolledusers.png|thumb|Enrolling users method 1]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolled users&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Enrol users&#039; button at the top right or bottom left of the page&lt;br /&gt;
# Use the &#039;Assign roles&#039; dropdown if you wish to change the role&lt;br /&gt;
# Select enrolment options as appropriate&lt;br /&gt;
# Browse or search for the user. (Note that when searching for users, exact matches are listed first.)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the Enrol button opposite the user. The user will indent in the list and the enrol button will disappear, indicating that the user is enrolled.&lt;br /&gt;
# When you have finished, click the &#039;Finish enrolling users&#039; button (or simply close the enrol users box)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user will then appear in the list of enrolled users. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The enrolment option &#039;Recover user&#039;s old grades if possible&#039; is not ticked by default and is easy to miss. An admin can make it so that the checkbox is ticked for all courses on the site by enabling the setting &#039;Recover grades default&#039; in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; General settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Method 2&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manually enrolling users.png|thumb|Enrolling users method 2]]&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Enrol users&#039; icon in the edit column opposite manual enrolment&lt;br /&gt;
# Select users from the not enrolled users list, using Ctrl + click to select multiple users&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the add button to add the users to the enrolled users list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Editing individual enrolment start and end dates===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:individualenrolment24.png|thumb|Editing enrolment start and end dates]]Enrolment start and end dates may be edited for individual students as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolled users&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the edit icon in the enrolment methods column for a particular user.&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit dates as required, then click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Admin settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The manual enrolment plugin may be enabled or disabled site-wide in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Site-wide settings, including default settings for manual enrolment in new courses, may be set via &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manual enrolments&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enrolment expiration action - specifies what happens when user enrolments reach expiration date. Please note that option &amp;quot;Unenrol user from course&amp;quot; purges grades, group memberships, preferences and other user related data from the courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Hour to send enrolment expiry notifications - specify hour for sending expiration notifications.&lt;br /&gt;
* Add instance to new courses- if this is enabled, then whenever a new course is created, manual enrolments will automatically added to new courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Enable manual enrolments - this specifies if enrol instances are enabled by default in new courses, it is strongly recommended to keep this setting enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
* Default role - this sets the default role, which is normally student and may be altered by a teacher in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
* Default enrolment duration - this sets the default length of enrolment in new courses.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notify before enrolment expires - specifies if teacher or optionally students should be notified before the expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
* Notification threshold - specify how many days should be users notified before the enrolment expiration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Manual enrolment capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/manual:config|Configure manual enrol instances]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/manual:enrol|Enrol users]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/manual:manage|Manage user enrolments]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/manual:unenrol|Unenrol users from the course]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/enrol/manual:unenrolself|Unenrol self from the course]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Enrolled users]] &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/bo1hX8tVw5U Manually Enrolling Users]  MoodleBites video on YouTube &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Manuelle Einschreibung]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Inscripción manual]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:手動登録]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type&amp;diff=108114</id>
		<title>Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type&amp;diff=108114"/>
		<updated>2015-02-24T11:23:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: subpart penalty factor&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Embedded answers (Cloze)&#039;&#039;&#039; questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various answers embedded within it, including multiple choice, short answers and numerical answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Until mid2013, there was no graphical interface to create these questions within your Moodle site - you needed to specify the question format using the text box or by importing them from external files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can link to an external web site that does create these questions from a graphical interfase, see the &#039;&#039;[http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php Online Cloze Question quiz generator]&#039;&#039; below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is one [[Cloze editor module]] add-on in the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=other_cloze Moodle plugins database] for Moodle 1.9 and 2.x, that will let you create these questions from a graphical interfase within your Moodle site, but it will overwrite your current HTML editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Lots of people suggested that [[Hot Potatoes]] software is the easiest way to create Embedded answer (Cloze) questions.  Once you have created your questions on your PC, you can then import them into Moodle&#039;s quiz module.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question set-up==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the question category&lt;br /&gt;
#Give the question a descriptive name - this allows you to identify it in the question bank.&lt;br /&gt;
#Enter the passage of text (in Moodle format - see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Format|Format]] below) into the &#039;question text&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an image to display if you want to add a picture to the question. For the student, it appears immediately above the question text.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the &#039;default question grade&#039; (i.e. the maximum number of marks for this question).&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the &#039;Penalty factor&#039; (see [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Penalty_factor|Penalty factor]] below).&lt;br /&gt;
#If you wish, add general feedback. This is text that appears to the student after he/she has answered the question.&lt;br /&gt;
#The editor has been modified and allows you to test if your syntax is good. The different questions elements decoded will be displayed and syntax errors pinpoint. However, it cannot check if the question decoded is two questions in one because of an error syntax.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click Save changes to add the question to the category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Penalty factor ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;penalty factor&#039; only applies when the question is used in a quiz using adaptive mode - i.e. where the student is allowed multiple attempts at a question even within the same attempt at the quiz. If the penalty factor is more than 0, then the student will lose that proportion of the &#039;&#039;&#039;maximum&#039;&#039;&#039; grade upon each successive attempt. For example, if the default question grade is 10, and the penalty factor is 0.2, then each successive attempt after the first one will incur a penalty of 0.2 x 10 = 2 points. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 2.5:&#039;&#039;&#039; For multi-answer questions, the penalty is applied only to the incorrect subpart of the question. Imagine the four parts question (each part default mark is 1 so question total default mark is 4 and penalty set to 33.33333%): Match the following cities with the correct state: * San Francisco: (California/Arizona) * Tucson: (California/Arizona) * Los Angeles: (California/Arizona) * Phoenix: (California/Arizona). And that on first try responses were California - Arizona - California - Californiaand on the second try : California - Arizona- California - Arizona. The the resulting grade will be 1 + 1 + 1 + (1 - 0.333333) = 3.67 because penalty will only be applied to the fourth part that was wrong on the first try.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question rendering==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The question answer INPUT HTML ELEMENT ( Short and Numerical) or SELECT HTML ELEMENT (multichoice) are normally displayed in-line with the text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The size of INPUT HTML ELEMENT ( Short and Numerical) will be adjustable to the length of the longest answer (good or bad) + a random number (0 to 15% total length).([[User:Pierre Pichet|Pierre Pichet]] 15:37, 26 January 2008 (CST))&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The size will adjust to the length of the student response when displayed in the grading and feedback process.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The size of the SELECT HTML ELEMENT (multichoice) adjusts itself automatically to the longest answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Format==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Questions consist of a passage of text (in Moodle format) that has various sub-questions embedded within it, including&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* short answers (SHORTANSWER or SA or MW), case is unimportant,&lt;br /&gt;
* short answers (SHORTANSWER_C or SAC or MWC), case must match,&lt;br /&gt;
* numerical answers (NUMERICAL or NM),&lt;br /&gt;
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE or MC), represented as a dropdown menu in-line in the text&lt;br /&gt;
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_V or MCV), represented a vertical column of radio buttons, or&lt;br /&gt;
* multiple choice (MULTICHOICE_H or MCH), represented as a horizontal row of radio-buttons.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The structure of  each cloze sub-question is identical:&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;{&#039;&#039;&#039;  start the cloze sub-question with a bracket (AltGr+7)&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;1&#039;&#039;&#039; define a grade for each cloze by  a number (optional). This used for calculation of question grading.&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;:SHORTANSWER:&#039;&#039;&#039; define the type of cloze sub-question. Definition is bounded by &#039;:&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;~&#039;&#039;&#039; is a seperator between answer options&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;=&#039;&#039;&#039; marks a correct answer&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;#&#039;&#039;&#039; marks the beginning of an (optional) feedback message&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;&#039;}&#039;&#039;&#039;  close the cloze sub-question at the end with a bracket (AltGr+0)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Now a very simple example:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
{1:SHORTANSWER:=Berlin} is the capital of Germany.&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For full details of the format for embedded-answers questions, see the [[Embedded_Answers_%28Cloze%29_question_type#Detailed_syntax_explanations|detailed syntax explanation]] below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
NB: Be careful when copying a cloze type question into the WYSIWYG HTML editor, as line breaks tend to get added, which destroys the question.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the correct answer contains } # ~ / &amp;quot; or \ you will have to escape them by putting a \ in front of each such character. The { shouldn&#039;t be escaped, this can be vital in getting TeX expressions to work. In the feedback ~ and } must be escaped otherwise it will be interpreted as &#039;&#039;the next answer&#039;&#039; or &#039;&#039;end of the short answer section&#039;&#039; respectively. Quotation signs: &amp;quot; can lead to trouble anyhow in both places. Use the HTML entity: &amp;amp; quot; (without the space between &#039;&#039;&amp;amp;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;quot;&#039;&#039;). If you want to have Mathematical symbols there can be problems with the \ used in TeX expressions. One alternative can be to use [[unicode]] characters. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See the notes further down about numerical embedded question!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Examples===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example 1====&lt;br /&gt;
The following text creates a simple embedded-answers question:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 Match the following cities with the correct state:&lt;br /&gt;
 * San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}&lt;br /&gt;
 * Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}&lt;br /&gt;
 * Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}&lt;br /&gt;
 * Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}&lt;br /&gt;
 The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!&lt;br /&gt;
 ~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after&lt;br /&gt;
 Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
And the result will be:&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cloze.gif|Cloze question type]] &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Example 2====&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;div style=&amp;quot;padding: 1em;border: 1px dashed #FFB53A;color: black;background-color: #f9f9f9;font-family: monospace;font-size:1.2em;&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
This question consists of some text with an answer embedded right here {1:MULTICHOICE:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and right after that you will have to deal with this short answer {1:SHORTANSWER:Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~=Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
and finally we have a floating point number {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for half credit answer in the nearby region of the correct answer}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The  multichoice question can also be shown in the vertical display of the standard moodle multiple choice.&lt;br /&gt;
{2:MCV:1. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~2. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=3. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%4. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or in an horizontal display that is included here in a table&lt;br /&gt;
{2:MCH:a. Wrong answer#Feedback for this wrong answer~b. Another wrong answer#Feedback for the other wrong answer~=c. Correct answer#Feedback for correct answer~%50%d. Answer that gives half the credit#Feedback for half credit answer}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A shortanswer question where case must match. Write moodle in upper case letters {1:SHORTANSWER_C:moodle#Feedback for moodle in lower case ~=MOODLE#Feedback for MOODLE in upper case ~%50%Moodle#Feedback for only first letter in upper case}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that addresses like www.moodle.org and smileys :-) all work as normal:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
a) How good is this? {:MULTICHOICE:=Yes#Correct~No#We have a different opinion}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
b) What grade would you give it? {3:NUMERICAL:=3:2}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/div&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Cloze example.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Some things to note:&lt;br /&gt;
* The individual embedded answers are represented by the code in braces {}.&lt;br /&gt;
* The number at the start is the &#039;weight&#039;, so in this case each answer contributes an equal share of the overall grade.&lt;br /&gt;
* The correct option in each case is preceded either by an = sign or by %100%. &lt;br /&gt;
* The text appearing after the # that follows each option is the feedback that the student will see if they choose that option.&lt;br /&gt;
* If the student enters &#039;Marseille&#039; in the final example, they score 50% of the total grade.&lt;br /&gt;
* The asterisk * preceding the &amp;quot;Wrong answer&amp;quot; feedback in the final example means that the student will see this feedback if they enter anything other than &amp;quot;Paris&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Marseille&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
* For multiple choice vertical or horizontal rendering there is no automatic numbering, though can added at each answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Detailed syntax explanations==&lt;br /&gt;
# all question items within a cloze-type question are coded inside curled braces { }&lt;br /&gt;
# the number which appears between the opening brace and the colon {1: is the weighting of that item; if it is set at 1 for all the items, it needs not be specified, so you can have {:&lt;br /&gt;
# after the colon we have the item question type: MULTICHOICE, SHORTANSWER, NUMERICAL&lt;br /&gt;
# &#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;.- If you have installed the [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=13&amp;amp;rid=338 REGEXP question type plugin] you can also use the REGEXP question type&lt;br /&gt;
# the syntax for MULTICHOICE and SHORTANSWER is the same; the only difference is in the displaying of the item to the student&lt;br /&gt;
# the order of the various answers is indifferent (except if you want a catch-all for wrong answers, see #13 below)&lt;br /&gt;
# a correct answer is preceded with the equal sign = or a percentage (usually %100%) - &#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: [[Talk:Embedded_Answers_(Cloze)_question_type| The equal sign (=) doesn&#039;t seem to work with SHORTANSWER.]]&lt;br /&gt;
# a wrong answer is preceded with nothing or a percentage (usually %0%)but you can even use negative points by preceding with ~%-25% [not before Moodle 2.0])&lt;br /&gt;
# you can allocate some points between 0 and 100 to some answers, if you put the appropriate percentage&lt;br /&gt;
# all answers except the first one are separated from one another by the tilde ~ sign&lt;br /&gt;
# answers can be followed by an optional feedback message, preceded with the # sign; if there is no feedback message, the # sign can be present or absent, it does not matter&lt;br /&gt;
# note that the feedback message and (since [[User:Pierre Pichet|Pierre Pichet]] 24 May 2008 )in 1.9 the correct answer are displayed in a small popup window (if and when the correct and or feedback have been declared accessible to the students in the Quiz settings) upon mouse hovering. The popup window has a title &amp;quot;feedback&amp;quot; and you can use HTML tags to format your feedback. In some browsers (For example IE5.5) the form fields can cover part of the feedback windows. It can help to not have the formfields for the answers too close to each other.&lt;br /&gt;
# in the SHORTANSWER type you may want to put a catch-all (wrong) answer in order to send a &amp;quot;wrong, try again&amp;quot; feedback; you can do this by inserting an asterisk &#039;&#039;&#039;*&#039;&#039;&#039; as &#039;&#039;&#039;the very last expected answer&#039;&#039;&#039; in your formula&lt;br /&gt;
# in the MULTICHOICE question type the answers are automatically scrambled&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Numerical Cloze questions==	 &lt;br /&gt;
		 &lt;br /&gt;
From the student perspective, a numerical Cloze question looks just like a short-answer question or &#039;&#039;fill in the blanks&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The difference is that numerical answers are allowed to have an accepted error. This allows a continuous range of answers to be set. You can also express your answer in some different numerical formats. 23.4 23,4 (some countries use , as a decimal separator) and 2.34E+1 (meaning 2.34*10^1) would be interpreted as the same.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== False positives ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;&#039; the following examples of false positives do &#039;&#039;&#039;not&#039;&#039;&#039; apply to Moodle 1.8+, where you cannot use percentages or fractions as the answers in a numerical Cloze test; Moodle will generate an error if you try to save such a question. However the following may be relevant for earlier versions of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 More examples:	 &lt;br /&gt;
 0.5 accepts .5 0.5 ,5 0,5 0.500 5e-1 5E-1 but not 1/2 50% 	 &lt;br /&gt;
 50% accepts 50% 50.0% 5E1% 50/100 even &#039;&#039;&#039;50/1000 50&#039;&#039;&#039; but not 500/1000 0.5	 &lt;br /&gt;
 1/2 accepts 1/2 &#039;&#039;&#039;1/3 1twenty&#039;&#039;&#039; but not 2/4 0.5 0,5 3/6 50% ½	 &lt;br /&gt;
 ½ accepts ½	 &lt;br /&gt;
 HALF doesn&#039;t even accept HALF (maybe &#039;&#039;&#039;0&#039;&#039;&#039;?)	 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to accept several variants you can have them in the same {} but &#039;&#039;&#039;be careful, notice the &amp;quot;false positives&amp;quot; in bold&#039;&#039;&#039;!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Syntax for numerical Cloze questions===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The format of a NUMERICAL Cloze question is similar to that of the other Cloze types and they can be mixed in the same question. As with other Cloze tests, you write your question or incomplete text, and add the Cloze code at the point where the student is supposed to enter their numerical answer.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An example of the syntax used is shown below:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note: &#039;&#039;&#039; It is preferable to write the code in &#039;source code&#039; mode. The WSIWYG editor can insert linebreaks that make the question not function. The linebreak in the example box below is for readability only! A problem with these questions is the readability of the code! :(	&lt;br /&gt;
		 &lt;br /&gt;
 {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8	 &lt;br /&gt;
 ~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. 	 &lt;br /&gt;
	 &lt;br /&gt;
In this example:&lt;br /&gt;
* 2: is the question point weight, which means that this question has twice the weight in the final point(s) for this question as other partial answers with weight 1 (or no declared weight - you can start with {: for the default weight 1) in the same question.&lt;br /&gt;
* NUMERICAL: says what kind of question it is. It must be in CAPS. &lt;br /&gt;
* =23.8:0.1 = or %100% means correct if the answer is 23.8 with an accepted error of 0.1, then any number between 23.7 and 23.9 will be accepted as correct. (In the GIFT numerical question one can express an interval like this 13..15 or 14:1 but in Cloze only 14:1 works.)	 &lt;br /&gt;
* #Feedback for correct answer 23.8 is preceded by #&lt;br /&gt;
* ~%50%23.8:2 ~ is the separator for answer alternatives %50% means this answer would get 50% of the score that the more precise answer had gotten. Because the tolerance here is 2, 21.8 to 25.8 would get this point and feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The feedback (which is seen within a popup window when the user hovers over the answer space) is formattable with HTML tags. For example, if you want an exponent, surround it with superscript tags: &amp;amp;lt;sup&amp;amp;gt; &amp;amp;lt;/sup&amp;amp;gt;. You can even include pictures in the feedback popup, but you must clean out all &amp;quot; characters and save while still in source code mode (not WYSIWYG). So, this works in feedback popup:&lt;br /&gt;
 #See this picture:&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;img src=Something.gif /&amp;gt;}	 &lt;br /&gt;
but not this:&lt;br /&gt;
 #See this picture:&amp;amp;lt;br&amp;amp;gt;&amp;amp;lt;img src=&amp;quot;Something.gif&amp;quot; /&amp;gt;}	 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(ALGEBRA and TEX filters don&#039;t work in the feedback popups, but they can be very useful in the question writing for math/science expressions). But you can use [[Unicode]] characters.	 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to give feedback for any answer that didn&#039;t fit the intervals you already have specified feedback for, add some BIG general intervals, like for positive answers (if they aren&#039;t bigger than 20000 you could add:	 &lt;br /&gt;
 ~%0%10000.0001:10000#Feedback for unspecified not_right answers}	 &lt;br /&gt;
This would give feedback for anything from 0.0001 to 20000.0001 (that hadn&#039;t already gotten feedback). I didn&#039;t want to include 0 since that special case as well as negative ought to have specific reactions.	 &lt;br /&gt;
 ~%0%0#Hey! It can&#039;t be zero	 &lt;br /&gt;
 ~%0%-10000.0001:10000#We just want the size here,	 &lt;br /&gt;
 so a negative value is not what we want}			 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Numerical questions could, before version 1.7, also have case-insensitive non-numerical answers. This is useful whenever the answer for a numerical question is something like +inf, -inf, NaN etc.&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing CLOZE questions==&lt;br /&gt;
If you try importing directly as CLOZE this text:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
Single line per question! Match the following cities with the correct state:&lt;br /&gt;
* San Francisco: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}&lt;br /&gt;
* Tucson: {1:MULTICHOICE:California#Wrong~%100%Arizona#OK}&lt;br /&gt;
* Los Angeles: {1:MULTICHOICE:=California#OK~Arizona#Wrong}&lt;br /&gt;
* Phoenix: {1:MULTICHOICE:%0%California#Wrong~=Arizona#OK}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The capital of France is {1:SHORTANSWER:%100%Paris#Congratulations!~%50%Marseille#No, that is the second largest city in France (after Paris).~*#Wrong answer. The capital of France is Paris, of course.}.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
23+ 0.8 = {2:NUMERICAL:=23.8:0.1#Feedback for correct answer 23.8 ~%50%23.8:2#Feedback for ½credit near correct answer}. 	 &amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You would get all three questions as different parts of &#039;&#039;&#039;ONE question&#039;&#039;&#039;. (NOTE see that there are no linebreaks between the { } !)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Multiple CLOZE questions can be imported using the XML format:&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;?xml version=&amp;quot;1.0&amp;quot; encoding=&amp;quot;UTF-8&amp;quot;?&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- question: 1  --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;cloze&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;name&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Book Test #1&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;![CDATA[..............]]&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;generalfeedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/generalfeedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;!-- question: 2 --&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;question type=&amp;quot;cloze&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;name&amp;gt;&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;Book Test #2&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/name&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;![CDATA[............]]&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/questiontext&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;generalfeedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;text&amp;gt;&amp;lt;/text&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/generalfeedback&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;shuffleanswers&amp;gt;0&amp;lt;/shuffleanswers&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/question&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/quiz&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;/pre&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
You would put the question text including CLOZE code in the  .......  spaces.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Online Cloze Question quiz generator==&lt;br /&gt;
* There is a website to generate CLOZE quizzes for Moodle (1.9 and 2.x versions) and/or to try out the CLOZE editor integration for Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
* This editor was built at the Chair of Applied English Linguistics at Universitaet Tuebingen, Germany, by Andreas Glombitza (andiglombitza(at)googlemail.com) and Achim Skuta (achim.skuta(at)googlemail.com).&lt;br /&gt;
* The authors are currently maintaining this software and webservice as a private project.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Website: [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php]&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
* See the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=other_cloze Moodle add-on in the Moodle plugins database] that will let you create these questions from a graphical interfase within your Moodle site, but it will overwrite your current tinymce editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* See the [http://projects.ael.uni-tuebingen.de/quiz/htmlarea/index.php online Cloze question generator].&lt;br /&gt;
* Download the newest version of the [[Cloze editor module]] for Moodle 1.9, 2.0, 2.1 and 2.4 (compatible with 2.5)from [http://code.google.com/p/moodle-cloze-editor21/downloads/list google code]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This information was drawn from:&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36521 Is there a guide to using the cloze format?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=36430&amp;amp;parent=170308 Cloze-type question syntax] forum post&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Question Cloze à réponses intégrées]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja: 穴埋め問題 ( Cloze ) タイプ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Lückentext-Frage]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[zh:填空題(克漏字)]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Tipo de Pregunta incrustadas (Cloze)]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grade_settings&amp;diff=107915</id>
		<title>Grade settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grade_settings&amp;diff=107915"/>
		<updated>2014-06-27T09:30:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.7 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grades}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Course grade settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Course grade settings.png|thumb|Course grade settings]]Course grade settings determine how the gradebook appears for all participants in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Course grade settings are found in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Grade administration &amp;gt; Course grade settings&#039;&#039; or via the gradebook Settings tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default course grade settings are set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grader report preferences==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Grader report preferences.png|thumb|Grader report preferences]]Teachers can set their preferences for the grader report via the gradebook &#039;My preferences&#039; tab. These settings will apply to all courses for that teacher. The teacher may change them at any time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;New in 2.5:&#039;&#039;&#039; It&#039;s  possible to set the grader report to only show active participants or all participants (including suspended users) from the &#039;&#039;Show only active enrolments&#039;&#039; setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default grader report preferences are set by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; Report settings &amp;gt; Grader report&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle 2.4.2 onwards, the default number of students per page (&#039;&#039;grade_report_studentsperpage&#039;&#039;) can safely be increased without any loss of data when grading large numbers of students with many assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Default values for all grade settings can be set by an administrator. The easiest way to do so is to log in as admin then browse a course gradebook and follow the &#039;Change defaults&#039; links.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following additional grade settings can be found in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; General settings&#039;&#039;. The settings will affect all gradebooks used by all teachers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Graded Roles===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Graded roles are the type of user that will appear in the gradebook. Most of the time &amp;quot;student&amp;quot; is the only one needed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===User profile report===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The default user profile report setting has just one option, &#039;User report&#039;, unless a custom user report has been added to the site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can view the user reports for all or selected students in the course in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Grades administration &amp;gt; User report&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Include scales in aggregation===&lt;br /&gt;
Scales can be included as numbers in all aggregated grades across all gradebooks in all courses. Changing this setting will force all aggregated grades to be recalculated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is checked (and it is by default) then all custom scales will have a corresponding value that is assigned based on the number of options in the scale (ie. three values will have values of 1,2,3) and this will be included in the grade aggregation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enable publishing===&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Grade publishing settings.png|thumb|Grade publishing settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
Grade publishing is a way of importing and exporting grades via a URL without being logged in to Moodle. Grade publishing is intended for administrators only. Security implications should be thoroughly considered before allowing non-admin users to publish grades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grade publishing may be enabled by checking the gradepublishing box. If enabled, administrators are provided with [[Grade export|grade export]] publishing settings in each course gradebook.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Recover grades default===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When [[Enrolled users|manually enrolling]] a student in a course, there is an option &#039;Recover user&#039;s old grades if possible&#039;, however this checkbox is easy to miss. Enabling &#039;Recover grades default&#039; results in &#039;Recover user&#039;s old grades if possible&#039; being ticked for every course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:enrol users enrolment options.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Unlimited grades===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can enter grades over 100% directly in the gradebook if the &#039;&#039;unlimitedgrades&#039;&#039; setting is enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:edit|Edit grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:export|Export grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:hide|Hide/unhide grades or items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:import|Import grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:lock|Lock grades or items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:manage|Manage grade items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:managegradingforms|Manage advanced grading methods]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:manageletters|Manage grade letters]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:manageoutcomes|Manage grade outcomes]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:unlock|Unlock grades or items]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:view|View own grades]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewall|View grades of other users]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/grade:viewhidden|View hidden grades for owner]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://youtu.be/QWE0c_-NjHE Moodle 2 Grades Administration settings]  MoodleBites video on YouTube  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Bewertungseinstellungen]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Configuraciones de calificación]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Paramètres de notes]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:Grader_report_preferences.png&amp;diff=107914</id>
		<title>File:Grader report preferences.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:Grader_report_preferences.png&amp;diff=107914"/>
		<updated>2014-06-27T09:29:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: Marycooch uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:Grader report preferences.png&amp;amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:BadgesIntro2.png&amp;diff=107850</id>
		<title>File:BadgesIntro2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:BadgesIntro2.png&amp;diff=107850"/>
		<updated>2014-05-29T09:56:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: Marycooch uploaded a new version of &amp;amp;quot;File:BadgesIntro2.png&amp;amp;quot;&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Import_questions&amp;diff=107801</id>
		<title>Import questions</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Import_questions&amp;diff=107801"/>
		<updated>2014-04-07T11:09:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Managing questions}}&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle has a number of different formats that can be used to import questions into [[Question bank]] categories and as [[Adding a question page|lesson question pages]]. These include some proprietary quiz software formats, as well as text files and Moodle formats. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing questions from an existing file==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to import questions from a file on your network/computer or from a file that has been saved or uploaded into your course files.  The underlying [[Import_questions#Character_encoding|character encoding]] of this file is important.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Moodle XML format is the recommended import question type format as it enables the maximum amount of question data (such as question feedback) to be imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Question bank import process ===&lt;br /&gt;
The question bank allows you a great deal of flexibility when importing questions. To import questions into Moodle&#039;s [[Question bank]], use the Questions link in the course administration and select the import tab. In most versions of Moodle it is also possible to get to this screen (produced by ../question/import.php) while editing an existing quiz.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Questions import 197.png|thumb|center|Import question formats from the import tab]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Select import tab&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the question type to import&lt;br /&gt;
*General: pick the category, determine if the context and category information that maybe contained in a GIFT or XML file should be used. &lt;br /&gt;
*Select what should happen if there are no grades or an error is detected in the import process.&lt;br /&gt;
*Determine the file to import&lt;br /&gt;
**Import from file upload.  Use the browse function to import a file from your computer. Use the &amp;quot;Upload this file&amp;quot; button to import the questions.&lt;br /&gt;
**Import from file already in course files. A popup window will take you to the course files start page. Use the &amp;quot;Import from this file&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Question bank import file gen import 1.png|thumb|center|General and import file parameters sections]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Lesson module process===&lt;br /&gt;
The question types that can be imported into a lesson are similar to question bank.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Lesson Import question types.png|thumb|center|Lesson screen asking which file type will be imported]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Lesson module|Lesson]] can only import from a file located on the teachers computer.&lt;br /&gt;
*In edit, using the expanded view&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the position where questions should be inserted into the lesson&lt;br /&gt;
*Click on the Import question link between the pages.&lt;br /&gt;
*Select the file type&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the browse function to find the file on your computer&lt;br /&gt;
*Import the selected file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Question import formats==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[GIFT]] === &lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; text format for import and export. Reasonably comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Moodle XML format|Moodle XML]] ===&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle &#039;proprietary&#039; xml format for import and export. Very comprehensive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====How do you create XML files to enable import of images?====&lt;br /&gt;
Discussion: http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=181211&lt;br /&gt;
=====OPTION 1=====&lt;br /&gt;
Check out http://www.slideshare.net/tjuly/adding-images-to-moodle-quiz-and-import-via-xml&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This describes a use of a text to XML conversion process using http://vletools.com/questions/quiz &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please add any further comments here:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=====OPTION 2=====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Aiken]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format is an easy way of writing multiple-choice questions for import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Blackboard === &lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s possible to  import both .dat files containing just questions text or zip archives containing questions and associated medias (images, sounds, ...).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If your questions contains images they are imported too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Also both Blackboard POOL and QTI files are supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Questions produced with TestGen and Examview softwares and saved as Blackboard files are imported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the zip archives contains several resources files all questions from all files are imported. &amp;quot;Undeployed&amp;quot; Blackboard quiz are also supported.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these steps to import questions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create a quiz with questions in Examview Test Generator v. 6.2.1 or another question generator able to save questions as Blackboard files like TestGen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Export the quiz to Blackboard 6.0-7.0 format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. From the &#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039; tab for your course choose &#039;&#039;Question bank&#039;&#039; and then &#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;. Make sure you use the Blackboard format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; Some tutorials on the web explain that you need to edit files to re-link images. &#039;&#039;&#039;This is no more needed&#039;&#039;&#039;. Images are imported without any editing.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Importing questions in different categories ====&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
If you check the &amp;quot;Get category from file&amp;quot; option during import,  the category name for each resource file will be extracted for the resource file and created if necessary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &amp;quot;Get category from file&amp;quot; is unchecked, all questions will be imported in the current category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==== Other alternative method to import Blackboard questions files ====&lt;br /&gt;
There is an alternative to the Blackboard format to import questions saved as Blackboard files.&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.nashcc.edu/moodlexmlbuilder MoodleXMLBuilder] discussed below in [https://docs.moodle.org/23/en/Import_questions#See_also See Also] can also be used to convert ExamView exports to Moodle XML. &lt;br /&gt;
Images are supported and included within the Moodle XML when using [http://www.nashcc.edu/moodlexmlbuilder MoodleXMLBuilder].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you decide to use MoodleXMLBuilder to convert your Blackboard zip file to a Moodle XML file, rather than use the recommended method to directly import your zip file using the Blackboard format (see above), here is how to do it:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create a quiz with questions in Examview Test Generator v. 6.2.1 or another question generator able to save questions as Blackboard files like TestGen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Export the quiz to Blackboard 6.0-7.0 format&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Use the aforementioned [http://www.nashcc.edu/moodlexmlbuilder MoodleXMLBuilder] to convert from &#039;&#039;&#039;ExamView Export to Blackboard 6.0-7.0&#039;&#039;&#039; into the XML format that Moodle accepts.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. From the &#039;&#039;Settings&#039;&#039; tab for your course choose &#039;&#039;Question bank&#039;&#039; and then &#039;&#039;Import&#039;&#039;. Make sure you use the Moodle XML format. You may also need to set &#039;&#039;Stop on error&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;No&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
FYI To install MoodleXMLBuilder you may need to be logged into an administrator account or select &amp;quot;Run as administrator&amp;quot; from the right-click menu. You&#039;ll also need java and you will need to run the MoodleXMLBuilder.exe application from its install directory (the installer doesn&#039;t seem to create a Start menu entry). For Windows 7 it was C:\Program Files (x86)\MoodleXMLBuilder\MoodleXMLBuilder.exe.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Course Test Manager === &lt;br /&gt;
This format enables you to import questions from the Course Test Manager from Course Technology.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Embedded Answers (Cloze) question type|Embedded Answers (Cloze)]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format is a multiple question, multiple answer question with embedded answers. They can be a bit tricky to develop, but they are a unique way of asking questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Examview === &lt;br /&gt;
ExamView 4 supported an XML export format that Moodle can import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Follow these steps to import questions from ExamView 4.0.8&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Create a new test using ExamView&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. After selecting the types of questions and how many of each Click on File - Export – Change Save As Type to ExamView XML&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. After creating the export of your ExamView test login to your Moodle site&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4. Go to the course you wish to add the quiz to and Turn Editing On&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. Scroll down to the topic or week you wish to add a Quiz Click add an activity – highlight quiz, Enter a name and introduction for the quiz and any other applicable information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Click save and display&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. Editing quiz - click Edit then Import, click the radio button next to ExamView&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. Browse to the location you saved the file highlight and click open, then click the upload this file button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9. Review the questions imported, click continue, click on Quiz, select all and click add to quiz&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
10. Save Changes, click on the preview tab view the test and the quiz is ready.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you are using a newer version of ExamView, you should export your questions from Examview choosing the Blackboard format:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. In ExamView choose one of the two Blackboard export options, either Blackboard option can be imported into Moodle, however it is recommended to choose the Blackboard 7.1+ option&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Save the zip archive ExamView creates&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3. Import this zip file in Moodle using &amp;quot;Blackboard V6+&amp;quot; format. see the above paragraph about the Blackboard V6+ import format for more informations.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Hot Potatoes]]===&lt;br /&gt;
A freeware program that can export questions into Moodle. In order to import Hot Potatoes questions into a Moodle quiz, the administrator must first install the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=mod_hotpot Hotpot module] and the [https://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qformat_hotpot Hotpot question import]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
----&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note 1&#039;&#039;&#039;.- All types of Hot Potatoes question types can be imported into Moodle, but &#039;&#039;JCross&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;JMix&#039;&#039; questions will be changed to Short Answer questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Can be imported into the &#039;&#039;Quiz questions&#039;&#039; bank:&lt;br /&gt;
**Cloze questions (&#039;&#039;JCloze&#039;&#039;); &lt;br /&gt;
**Match questions (&#039;&#039;JMatch&#039;&#039;); &lt;br /&gt;
**Multiple Choice questions (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
**Short Answer questions (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;JCross&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;JMix&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Can be imported into Moodle&#039;s &#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039; module:&lt;br /&gt;
**Match questions (&#039;&#039;JMatch&#039;&#039;); &lt;br /&gt;
**Multiple Choice questions (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note 2&#039;&#039;&#039;.- For Hot Potatoes&#039; Multiple Choice question type (&#039;&#039;JQuiz&#039;&#039;), the &#039;&#039;Multiple-choice&#039;&#039; &#039;&#039;Short answer&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Multi-select&#039;&#039; question-type will imported as they are. &#039;&#039;Hybrid&#039;&#039; questions will be imported as &#039;&#039;MultiChoice&#039;&#039; questions, i.e. they will not start as Short Answer questions and then change to Multiple Choice questions after several wrong responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Learnwise===&lt;br /&gt;
This format can import multiple choice questions saved in Learnwise&#039;s XML format.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===[[Missing word question format|Missing word]]===&lt;br /&gt;
This format is only used for  multiple choice questions and short answer questions, similar to GIFT.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[WebCT format]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format supports importing multiple choice and short answers questions from WebCT&#039;s text format. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Caution:&#039;&#039;&#039; Keep in mind that WebCT allows more than one &amp;quot;blank&amp;quot; per short answer question; whereas, Moodle will only accommodate one blank per question. Questions that used multiple short answers in a question will not convert successfully.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== [[Word table format]] === &lt;br /&gt;
This format supports importing all question types (except calculated) from structured tables in Microsoft Word files. &lt;br /&gt;
Further documentation is available at [[Word table format]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The plugin is available in the Moodle Plugins Directory at [http://moodle.org/plugins/view.php?plugin=qformat_wordtable  Moodle2Word Word table import/export].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Importing from other programs==&lt;br /&gt;
=== Diploma 6 ===&lt;br /&gt;
Diploma 6 also supports an XML export format that Moodle can import. If you are using a newer version of Diploma, here are the steps to export from Diploma and import to Moodle.  The steps are the same as those for Blackboard(see above).&lt;br /&gt;
*Export from Diploma with the Blackboard LS 6.0 – 6.2 format. &lt;br /&gt;
*Import the .zip file using the Blackboard format.  The images are imported at the same time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Old formats===&lt;br /&gt;
*AON -This format is the same as the missing word format, except it creates matching questions from the multiple choice questions. Please note that from Moodle 1.8 it will no longer be part of the standard Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Character encoding ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is important that the imported file is encoded in the [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/UTF-8 UTF-8] standard.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this is not adhered to you may get import errors and/or strange characters in the imported materials. If the file is not UTF-8, an external tool must be used to change the encoding. Note that if only basic &#039;latin&#039; characters are used, then the coding issue can generally be ignored. Be particularly careful when creating questions using Microsoft Word. For reasons best known to themselves, Microsoft used their own encoding for some characters (incompatible with UTF-8) and this is likely to break the import.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;If you are having problems with the first question (or category modifier) in the file being misinterpreted (this particularly applies to GIFT format) it might be your editor adding a &amp;quot;Byte-Order-Mark&amp;quot; character at the beginning of the file. This is particularly common in Windows programs (e.g. Notepad) and is another good reason to steer clear of Microsoft products for text editing (as apposed to word processing). There are plenty of free or low cost text editors available for download. The BOM is neither recommended or required as UTF8 does not have [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Byte-order_mark byte order issues].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Match grades==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Imported grades must &#039;&#039;&#039;exactly&#039;&#039;&#039; match one of the fixed list of valid grades, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 100, 90, 80, 75, 70, 66.666, 60, 50, 40, 33.333, 30, 25, 20, 16.666, 14.2857, 12.5, 11.111, 10, 5, 0&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
negative values of the above list are also permitted.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two settings for this switch. They affect how the import routine treats values that do not exactly match one of the values in the above list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Error if grade not listed - If a question contains any grades not found in the list an error is displayed and that question will not be imported.&lt;br /&gt;
* Nearest grade if not listed - If a grade is found that does not match a value in the list, the grade is changed to the closest matching value in the list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: some custom import formats write directly to the database and may bypass this check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Tips and tricks==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; It may be easier and faster to type many questions into a &#039;&#039;&#039;single text file&#039;&#039;&#039;, than to create a series of Quiz or Lesson question pages.  Some teachers report that once they master creating questions in one of the formats to import, they do not have to wait for their Moodle site screen to refresh and the process of selecting the next question type to create.   &lt;br /&gt;
*&#039;&#039;TIP:&#039;&#039; Want to use questions from your quiz in a &#039;&#039;&#039;Lesson&#039;&#039;&#039;?  Export the question category in say a GIFT format, then use a text editor to delete questions, or perhaps use a search and replace function to change names or places.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://vletools.com Moodle XML Converter] Convert your questions online into Moodle XML format. Allows to create questions from existing textfiles that should to be preformatted in a simple way. Supports TeX formulas, HTML and image embedded questions. Also can generate *.txt file from Moodle XML in case you need to export your questions in textfile.  &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.nashcc.edu/moodlexmlbuilder MoodleXMLBuilder] converts commonly-used test generator output into Moodle XML. MoodleXMLBuilder currently supports converting tests and question banks created in Blackboard, ExamView, TestGen, and EZTest. Images are fully supported within all question fields where images are allowed within the Moodle quiz module.&lt;br /&gt;
* The help button link next to the import file button gives a lot of detail about each format in a popup window.&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=51316 escaping problem in gift import?] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Converting files to UTF-8]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Import and export FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/user.php?id=726938&amp;amp;course=5 Eoin Campbell is working on a XSLT based import/export module for Word] - stay tuned! &lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.moodle2word.net website for converting Moodle Questions into tables in a Microsoft Word file, and vice versa].&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=202101 GIFT import - default grade] forum discussion &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Fragen importieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Importar preguntas]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Galderak_inportatu]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Importer des questions]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:問題のインポート]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Gradebook_report_settings&amp;diff=107799</id>
		<title>Gradebook report settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Gradebook_report_settings&amp;diff=107799"/>
		<updated>2014-04-04T07:23:52Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grades}}The gradebook report settings determine the appearance of gradebook reports in all courses on the site. The site administrator will find the default and enabled/disabled settings in the administration area. There &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers can use the &amp;quot;My report preferences&amp;quot; link in any course to essentially change their defaults and the way a report will display.  These preferences become the new defaults for that teacher until they are changed by the teacher. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grader report settings==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Grader report settings.png|thumb|Grader report settings]]Location: &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; Report settings &amp;gt; Grader report&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grader report settings include whether to show calculations, show/hide icons, column averages etc. Individual teachers may override certain settings for their own grader report view via their [[Grade preferences|&amp;quot;My report preferences&amp;quot;]] tab.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Quick grading and quick feedback===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Quick grading adds a text input element in each grade cell on the grader report, allowing you to edit the feedback for many grades at once. You can then click the Update button to perform all these changes at once, instead of one at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
*Quick feedback adds a text input element in each grade cell on the grader report, allowing you to edit many grades at once. You can then click the Update button to perform all these changes at once, instead of one at a time.&lt;br /&gt;
*By default, both quick grading and quick feedback are enabled. They can be disabled by de-selecting the appropriate checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Gradebook horizontal scrollbar.png|thumb|Grader report with horizontal scrollbar]]&lt;br /&gt;
===Static students column===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A static students column may be enabled so that teachers can scroll grades in the [[Grader report|grader report]] using a horizontal scrollbar.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview report settings==&lt;br /&gt;
Location: &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; Report settings &amp;gt; Overview report&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The overview report setting may be overridden for all overview reports in a course by a teacher in the [[Gradebook course settings|course settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show rank===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the show rank checkbox is ticked, the position of a grade item in relation to the rest of the class will be shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User report settings==&lt;br /&gt;
Location: &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Grades &amp;gt; Report settings &amp;gt; User report&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The user report settings may be overridden for all user reports in a course by a teacher in the [[Gradebook course settings|course settings]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show rank===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the show rank checkbox is ticked, the position of a grade item in relation to the rest of the class will be shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show percentage===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the show percentage checkbox is ticked, the percentage value of each grade item will be shown.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grade settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Einstellungen_für_Bewertungsberichte]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Kalifikazio-liburuaren_txostenen_ezarpenak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réglages du rapport de l&#039;évaluateur]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:評定表レポート設定]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Private_files&amp;diff=107798</id>
		<title>Private files</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Private_files&amp;diff=107798"/>
		<updated>2014-04-02T15:34:34Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Preventing access to Private files */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
In Moodle, each user has a private files area for uploading and managing a set of files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The private files area is accessible via &#039;&#039;Navigation &amp;gt; My home &amp;gt; My profile &amp;gt; My private files&#039;&#039; or the [[My private files block]]. If the private files repository is enabled by a site admin, it is available as a source within the filepicker when selecting files to use in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Private files management==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To add a file to your private files area&lt;br /&gt;
# On the Navigation menu, click My profile &amp;gt; My private files&lt;br /&gt;
# The file manager will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
# If desired, create a folder for your file(s)&lt;br /&gt;
#Click on the Add button to upload from the File picker or drag and drop from your desktop. It will look like the files are already there, but they aren&#039;t until you &#039;&#039;&#039;do the next step!&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:newprivatefiles.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Once uploaded, files will appear as thumbnails. Clicking the icons top right will display them in table or list view as an alternative.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:uploadedprivatefiles.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Making an alias/shortcut to a file in the private files area===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If a file is uploaded into your private files area, it is possible when using it elsewhere on Moodle to select it as an alias/shortcut. This means that if you update the file in your private files area, it will automatically update elsewhere on Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:privatefilesalias.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Working with files]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Private files size limit==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The size limit for each user&#039;s private files area is set by a site administrator in User quota in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=Preventing access to Private files==&lt;br /&gt;
*To prevent all users having access to Private files, the administrator should disable the repository in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Repositories&amp;gt;Manage repositories.&#039;&#039; and in &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define Roles&#039;&#039; edit the authenticated user role and set the capabilities &#039;moodle/user:manageownfiles&#039; and &#039;repository/user:view&#039; to prohibit.&lt;br /&gt;
*If  only students are to be prevented from accessing private files (but teachers etc, allowed) then a new role should be made and assigned system wide. See FAQ 6 in [[Repositories FAQ]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Private files capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/user:manageownfiles|Manage files in own private file area]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/repository/user:view|View user private files]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Archivos privados]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Fitxategi_pribatuak]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Fichiers personnels]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:プライベートファイル]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Eigene Dateien]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Repositories_FAQ&amp;diff=107797</id>
		<title>Repositories FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Repositories_FAQ&amp;diff=107797"/>
		<updated>2014-04-02T15:25:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: changed Settings to Administration&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Repositories}}&lt;br /&gt;
==What is a repository?==&lt;br /&gt;
A repostitory can be thought of as a storage area from which users can retrieve files to add to their course. There are several repositories enabled by default, such as  [[Server files]] which contains files from other courses a user has access to, or [[Upload a file repository| Upload a file]] which allows the user to search their computer or USB drive for a file to upload. Other repositories include [[Google Docs repository|Google Docs]],or [[Flickr repository|Flickr]]. See [[Repositories]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I enable repositories in Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Repositories can be enabled by a site administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Repositories &amp;gt; Manage repositories&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
All enabled and visible repositories will appear in the file picker.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I delete an embedded file previously added using the file picker?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need to do anything, as any unused files are detected and then deleted automatically after a period of time. Users cannot delete files manually, since they may be used elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Draft files are kept for 4 days and then moved to trash. When an activity or resource which uses a file is deleted, the file is moved immediately to trash. Trash is emptied i.e. files are deleted completely once a day.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==If I add a file (File resources) to a page, then delete the File resource, will the file I added remain in my Recent files list?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
No. The file will not be available.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I create a new repository on my site?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can create a new repository that will show up on the file picker.  See [[File system repository]].&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent students from accessing the private files repository?==&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to prevent students from accessing it but still wish other users to access it, follow these steps:&lt;br /&gt;
#In &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define Roles&#039;&#039; create a new role (such as &amp;quot;no private files&amp;quot;) and assign it in the system context. (See [[Creating custom roles]] for help creating a new role)&lt;br /&gt;
#Search for and set the capabilities &#039;&#039;moodle/user:manageownfiles&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;repository/user:view&#039;&#039; to &#039;&#039;&#039;prohibit.&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#In &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Assign system roles&#039;&#039;, give this role to the student(s) you do not wish to access private files. &lt;br /&gt;
#They may be enrolled as normal students in courses, but will not be able to use their private files.&lt;br /&gt;
==What happens if a teacher adds a file from their Private files to the course and they later leave and their account is closed?==&lt;br /&gt;
As long as a file is used in a context, such as a course, the file should remains available in that context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
That holds true when a teacher copies a file in a course from his My private files area and also when a teacher creates an alias/shortcut: in the latter case if a teacher deletes his files from My private files area that are used as alias/shortcut in some courses, Moodle will convert existing alias/shortcuts into file copies, so your course file links won&#039;t break. &#039;&#039;(copied from [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=2287 forum thread thanks to Andrea Bicciolo]&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I cannot access a student&#039;s repositories when logged in as that student==&lt;br /&gt;
This is intentional, as there is a security and privacy risk involved in an administrator being able to log in as a student and then explore and use the student&#039;s Google Drive, Dropbox and other similar repositories.&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File picker FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[File system repository FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=1807 Repositories forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Repositories FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Case_for_Moodle&amp;diff=107795</id>
		<title>Case for Moodle</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Case_for_Moodle&amp;diff=107795"/>
		<updated>2014-03-31T12:06:14Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: redirecting&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;#REDIRECT [[About Moodle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Jmol_filter&amp;diff=107794</id>
		<title>Jmol filter</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Jmol_filter&amp;diff=107794"/>
		<updated>2014-03-31T11:32:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: removing link to 1.9&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;[[Image:Jmol-quiz-example.png|thumb|200px|right|An example of the Jmol filter in action]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Jmol is open-source Java software for interactive 3D viewing of molecular structures. It can easily be embedded into a webpage... including a Moodle page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Moodle Jmol filter makes it incredibly simple for teachers to embed these viewers into teaching material (quizzes, discussion messages, etc).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* &#039;&#039;&#039;[https://github.com/geoffrowland/moodle-filter_jmol Download the Jmol filter for Moodle 2]&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Jmol filter is very useful for including a molecule viewer in a variety of situations - e.g. in a [[Label]], a [[Forums | Forum]] discussion, or a [[Quizzes| Quiz]] question. If you wish to load a molecule data file as a &amp;quot;resource&amp;quot;, you should also consider installing the [[Jmol resource module]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It requires no additional capability on your web server, but requires both Java and a JavaScript-enabled browser for the user.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.yeovil.ac.uk/course/view.php?id=63 See it in action in this course] (Log in as guest)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How to use===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Upload a molecule data file to the Moodle server. (This is important - Jmol refuses to display data files held on other servers, so you can&#039;t just link to a file that exists somewhere else on the web.)&lt;br /&gt;
# Simply create a link to the molecule file, wherever you want the molecule viewer to appear. &lt;br /&gt;
====In more detail:==== &lt;br /&gt;
* use the Moodle text editor (inside a course topic, label, HTML block, forum posting, quiz question etc) to add the text for a link, eg &#039;water&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* click-and drag to select the text link&lt;br /&gt;
* use the Insert Web Link button and enter the URL of the resource (already uploaded into the course&#039;s Files folder). The editor may &#039;scramble&#039; things, particularly if you use additional parametes (below) and you may find it best to use HTML Source ([&amp;lt;&amp;gt;] button) view. So default usage of the Jmol filter, for a structure water.pdb, in course 7  of your.moodle.ac.uk might use the code:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;a title=&amp;quot;Jmol&amp;quot; href=&amp;quot;http://your.moodle.ac.uk/moodle/file.php/7/water.pdb&amp;quot;&amp;gt;water&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
* Parameters can be added to the end of the URL to specify certain display options. Add &#039;&#039;&#039;?c=0&#039;&#039;&#039; to hide the controls, or &#039;&#039;&#039;?s=150&#039;&#039;&#039; to set the viewer&#039;s size at 150 pixels. Or &#039;&#039;&#039;?c=0&amp;amp;s=150&#039;&#039;&#039; to do both.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;a title=&amp;quot;Jmol&amp;quot; href=&amp;quot;http://your.moodle.ac.uk/moodle/file.php/7/water.pdb?c=0&amp;amp;s=150&amp;quot;&amp;gt;water&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The filter will output its own form tags. If you&#039;re displaying the molecule inside an existing form, please make sure you use the &#039;&#039;&#039;?f=0&#039;&#039;&#039; parameter to make sure the filter doesn&#039;t output its own form tags. This will ensure things work correctly in most web browsers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* If you wish to run extra [http://jmol.sourceforge.net/scripting/ Jmol script] upon intialisation, write &#039;&#039;&#039;JMOLSCRIPT{}&#039;&#039;&#039; straight after the link, and put your code inside the braces. For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &amp;lt;a title=&amp;quot;Jmol&amp;quot; href=&amp;quot;http://your.moodle.ac.uk/moodle/file.php/7/water.pdb&amp;quot;&amp;gt;water&amp;lt;/a&amp;gt;JMOLSCRIPT{rotate x 15; zoom 50; set axes on;}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Important: Using the filter in quizzes===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The filter can be used to display molecular viewers in quiz questions. But &#039;&#039;&#039;please make sure you use the ?f=0 parameter at the end of each URL&#039;&#039;&#039;, to prevent the filter outputting its own &amp;quot;form&amp;quot; tags.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The title tag is also essential for the filter to operate. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Contributed code]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Filter]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Forum_poster_role&amp;diff=107792</id>
		<title>Forum poster role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Forum_poster_role&amp;diff=107792"/>
		<updated>2014-03-29T09:52:33Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
The forum poster role is a highly restricted custom role which may be given to a visitor account to enable them to post in forums in a guest access course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that guests (ie, non-logged in users) are not able to post in forums even though the permissions suggest otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This role provides a workaround for situations where you have a course open to guests and you want to allow users not usually in your Moodle site to be able to contribute to discussions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that you first need to create an account to be used by any visitor, for example: username = &#039;&#039;visitor&#039;&#039; and password = &#039;&#039;visitor&#039;&#039; (or a password following your own restrictions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.As an administrator, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles&#039;&#039; and click the &#039;Add a new role&#039; button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.On the next screen, ignore archetypes and presets and click &#039;Continue&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.Give the role a name and if desired a description and tick the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Course&amp;quot; context:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forumposter.png|center|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.Click the &#039;Show advanced&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. In the filter, type &#039;&#039;forum&#039;&#039; and from the search results, set &#039;[[Capabilities/mod/forum:replypost|Reply to posts]]&#039;, &#039;[[Capabilities/mod/forum:startdiscussion|Start new discussions]]&#039; and &#039;[[Capabilities/mod/forum:viewdiscussion|View discussions]]&#039; to &#039;&#039;Allow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. In the filter, type &#039;&#039;profile&#039;&#039; and from the search results, set [[Capabilities/moodle/user:editownprofile|Edit own profile]]&#039;, and &#039;[[Capabilities/moodle/user:viewdetails|View user profiles]]&#039;  and to &#039;&#039;Prohibit&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. In the filter, type &#039;&#039;password&#039;&#039; and from the search results, set &#039;[[Capabilities/moodle/user:changeownpassword|Change own password]]&#039; to &#039;&#039;Prohibit&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. You may, according to the needs of your organisation, want to restrict other capabilities too, for example sending messages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forumpostercaps.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.Click the &#039;Create this role&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning the role to a visitor==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: All these steps must be done as an administrator:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If you have not already done so, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Accounts&amp;gt;Add a new user&#039;&#039; and create an account which will be used by any visitor to your guest access course.&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Assign system roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#You should now see your newly created role here&lt;br /&gt;
#Assign the role to the visitor account user.&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to your the guest access course where you wish the visitor to contribute to forums.&lt;br /&gt;
#From &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;enrolled users&#039;&#039; select the &#039;forum poster&#039; role from the dropdown and give this role to your visitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information for users==&lt;br /&gt;
#If your course has guest access, then it will not be immediately obvious that the visitor must log in to post. It might be helpful to add a label at the top of the course page with the details of the visitor username and password.&lt;br /&gt;
#Remember to that visitor forum posts will all display the same name, so you could suggest in your explanatory note that they might wish (or not) to add their name when contributing.&lt;br /&gt;
#Note that this role is very restricted, as it simply allows posting in forums. Some activities such as Quiz and Wiki are no longer accessible once the visitor is logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
tweaking&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Forum_settings&amp;diff=107789</id>
		<title>Forum settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Forum_settings&amp;diff=107789"/>
		<updated>2014-03-27T12:29:02Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Forum}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and editing a forum==&lt;br /&gt;
#With the editing turned on, in the section you wish to add your forum, click the &amp;quot;Add an activity or resource&amp;quot; link (or, if not present, the &amp;quot;Add an activity&amp;quot; drop down menu )and choose &#039;&#039;Forum&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
# This will take you to the forum settings page titled &amp;quot;Adding a new forum&amp;quot;. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can access an existing forum by clicking the configure icon or clicking on the forum and then &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:forumgeneral25.png|thumb|The General settings, expanded by default.]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Forum name===&lt;br /&gt;
A short name of the forum (e.g. &amp;quot;Favourite colour&amp;quot;), which will be displayed on the course homepage.&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Provide instructions for your students here so they are clear what they have to do. Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on course page===&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this will display the description on the course page just below the link to the forum.&lt;br /&gt;
===Forum type===&lt;br /&gt;
There are five forum types to choose from:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*A single simple discussion - A single topic discussion developed on one page, which is useful for short focused discussions (cannot be used with separate groups)&lt;br /&gt;
*Standard forum for general use - An open forum where anyone can start a new topic at any time; this is the best general-purpose forum&lt;br /&gt;
*Each person posts one discussion - Each person can post exactly one new discussion topic (everyone can reply to them though); this is useful when you want each student to start a discussion about, say, their reflections on the week&#039;s topic, and everyone else responds to these&lt;br /&gt;
*Q and A Forum - Instead of initiating discussions participants pose a question in the initial post of a discussion. Students may reply with an answer, but they will not see the replies of other Students to the question in that discussion until they have themselves replied to the same discussion.&lt;br /&gt;
*Standard forum displayed in a blog-like format&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: [[News forum]] is a special type of forum that is automatically created with a new course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Attachments and word count==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:attachmentsandwordcount.png|thumb|Attachments and word count settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum attachment size===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum file size that may be attached to a forum post will first be determined by the Moodle site settings. The teacher may want a smaller size limit for the forum. Server file capacity, student downloading speeds and discouraging images in a document centered discussion are a few reasons to limit file size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of attachments===&lt;br /&gt;
The maximum number of attachments a user can add to their forum post (from 0 to 100) can be specified here.&lt;br /&gt;
===Display word count===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
If &amp;quot;Display word count&amp;quot;  is enabled, then the number of words in forum posts will be shown at the bottom of each post.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Subscription and tracking==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:subscriptionandtracking.png|thumb|Subscription and tracking settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Subscription mode===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When a user is subscribed to a forum it means that they will receive notification (via popup and/or email, depending on the user’s messaging settings preferences) of each new posting. By default, posts are recorded about 30 minutes after the post was first written. Depending upon the email settings of each forum member, they may be sent an email immediately after the 30 minute edit window is closed, or in a batch at a time fixed by the site administrator (see below).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
People can usually choose whether or not they want to be subscribed to each forum. However, the teacher can choose to force subscription on a particular forum then all course users will be subscribed automatically, even those that enrol at a later time. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 4 subscription mode options:&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional subscription - Participants can choose whether to be subscribed&lt;br /&gt;
* Forced subscription - Everyone is subscribed and cannot unsubscribe&lt;br /&gt;
* Auto subscription - Everyone is subscribed initially but can choose to unsubscribe at any time&lt;br /&gt;
* Subscription disabled - Subscriptions are not allowed.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The subscription mode and subscribe or unsubscribe links appear in&#039;&#039; Navigation&amp;gt;Forum administration&#039;&#039; when viewing the forum.  teachers can quickly change the mode via the &#039;Subscription mode&#039; options and view the current subscribers via the &#039;Show/edit current subscribers&#039; link.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tips:&lt;br /&gt;
* Forcing everyone to subscribe is especially useful in the news forum and in forums towards the beginning of the course (before everyone has worked out that they can subscribe to these emails themselves).&lt;br /&gt;
* Changing the setting from &amp;quot;Yes, initially&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;No&amp;quot; will not unsubscribe existing users; it will only affect those who enrol in the course in the future. Similarly changing &amp;quot;Yes, initially&amp;quot; will not subscribe existing course users but only those enrolling later.&lt;br /&gt;
* There is also a &amp;quot;Subscriptions not allowed&amp;quot; setting which prevents Students from subscribing to a Forum. Teachers may choose to subscribe to a forum if they wish.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Read tracking for this forum?===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;quot;Read tracking&amp;quot; for a forum allows users to track read and unread forum posts. &lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forum administration.png|thumb|Don&#039;t track unread posts link]]&lt;br /&gt;
There are three options for this setting:&lt;br /&gt;
* Optional (default) - Students can turn tracking on or off for the forum via a link &#039;Track / Don&#039;t track unread posts&#039; in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* On - Tracking is always on in this forum (so no link in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
* Off - It is not possible to track unread forum posts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: The first two options require users to also have forum tracking set to yes in their profile settings. Currently the forum tracking profile setting overrides the read tracking forum setting. This problem has been reported in the tracker as MDL-29663.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==RSS==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default and will only appear if RSS has been enabled sitewide and for forums)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:rss25.png|thumb|RSS settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===RSS feed for this activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This turns RSS on or off for this forum. When set to “None,” RSS is disabled. When set to “Discussions,” the RSS feed will send out new discussions to subscribers. When set to “Posts,” the RSS feed will send out any new posts to subscribers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of RSS recent articles===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This number sets the number of articles that go out via RSS. If this number is set to 5, then the 5 most recent articles will be sent to subscribers. As new posts (or discussions) get added, the oldest post/discussion gets replaced on the RSS feed. If your forum gets a lot of posts every day, you will want to set this number high.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrative cron (admin/cron.php) must run after the forum is created and posts or discussions have been made.  Otherwise the user will receive an error &amp;quot;Error reading RSS data&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Post threshold for blocking==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:postthresholdforblocking.png|thumb|Post threshold for blocking settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Time period for blocking===&lt;br /&gt;
Choose here the time period in which can be blocked from posting more than a given number of posts. (To make a user exempt, give them the capability &#039;&#039;mod/forum:postwithoutthrottling&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
===Post threshold for blocking===&lt;br /&gt;
Set the number of posts here that users may add before they are blocked.&lt;br /&gt;
===Post threshold for warning===&lt;br /&gt;
Set the number of posts here after which users will be warned they are about to be blocked.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
Choose the category in which this forum will appear if ratings are enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Ratings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ratings25.png|thumb|Ratings settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Roles with permissions to rate===&lt;br /&gt;
Forum posts can be rated using a [[Scales|scale]]. By default, only teachers can rate forum posts, though students can be given permission to do so if desired (see Forum permissions below). This is a useful tool for giving students participation grades. Any ratings given in the forum are recorded in the [[Gradebook|gradebook]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Aggregate type===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can set an aggregate type, in other words, decide how all the ratings given to posts in a forum are combined to form the final grade (for each post and for the whole forum activity). See [[Ratings]] for an explanation of aggregate types and which one is best for your needs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Restrict ratings to items with dates in this range===&lt;br /&gt;
The teacher can allow only posts within a certain date range to be rated. This is useful if the teacher wants to keep students focused on the most recent content and maintain a specific pace within the forum or course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===RSS feed for this activity===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This turns RSS on or off for this forum. When set to “None,” RSS is disabled. When set to “Discussions,” the RSS feed will send out new discussions to subscribers. When set to “Posts,” the RSS feed will send out any new posts to subscribers. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Number of RSS recent articles===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This number sets the number of articles that go out via RSS. If this number is set to 5, then the 5 most recent articles will be sent to subscribers. As new posts (or discussions) get added, the oldest post/discussion gets replaced on the RSS feed. If your forum gets a lot of posts every day, you will want to set this number high.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The administrative cron (admin/cron.php) must run after the forum is created and posts or discussions have been made.  Otherwise the user will receive an error &amp;quot;Error reading RSS data&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: [[RSS feeds]] must be enabled for the site and for forums in order for the RSS settings to appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:cm25.png|thumb|Common module settings expanded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]] for more information, but note the details below relating specifically to use of forums with groups.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Group mode===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The &#039;&#039;&#039;group mode&#039;&#039;&#039; setting has three options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# No groups&lt;br /&gt;
# Separate groups - each group can only see their own group; others are invisible&lt;br /&gt;
# Visible groups - each group works in their own group, but can also see other groups&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the group mode is set to separate groups:&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:groupsforum.gif|401x|thumb|Adding a new discussion topic to a forum set to separate groups]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
* Teachers are given the option of adding a new discussion topic for all participants or for a selected group. If a teacher adds a new discussion topic for a selected group, then only group members can reply to it. If a teacher adds a new discussion topic for all participants, then students can&#039;t reply to it. (This is to ensure that groups are kept separate.)&lt;br /&gt;
* Students can only start discussions for their own group.&lt;br /&gt;
* Students can only reply to discussions started by other group members or discussions for their own group started by a teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the group mode is set to visible groups:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Teachers are given the option of adding a new discussion topic for all participants or for a selected group. If a teacher adds a new discussion topic for a selected group, then only group members can reply to it.&lt;br /&gt;
* Students can only start discussions for their own group.&lt;br /&gt;
* Students can only reply to discussions started by other group members or teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers, and other users with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/site:accessallgroups|moodle/site:accessallgroups]] set to allow, can view and post in all forum discussions, regardless of the group mode setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;: Single simple discussions cannot be set to separate groups (as this feature is not implemented). Instead, a standard forum should be used, with the teacher copying and pasting the same discussion topic for each separate group. If required, a permissions override may be set to prevent students from starting new discussions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access/Activity completion==&lt;br /&gt;
(These settings are collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These settings are visible if [[Conditional activities]] and [[Activity completion]] have been enabled in the site and the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locally assigned roles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Locally assigned roles&#039;&#039; selected users can be given additional roles in the activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Forum moderator===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A student can be given the rights to moderate a forum by assigning them the role of non-editing teacher in the forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Locally assigned roles&#039;&#039; click on student&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the student from the potential users list on the right, and use the Add button to add them to the existing users list on the left. Multiple users may be selected by holding down the Apple or Ctrl key whilst clicking on the users&#039; names. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [[Forum moderator role]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Forum permissions==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Role permissions for the activity can be changed in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Forum permissions.png|Frame|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Common permissions changes include:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enabling students to rate posts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Click the Allow icon (+) opposite the capability to rate posts and allow the role of student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Archiving a forum===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A forum can be closed / archived so that students may no longer start new discussions, nor add replies, but can still read all the discussions by clicking the Prevent icon (X) for the student role for the capabilities &#039;Start new discussions&#039; and &#039;Reply to posts&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Guests and posting in a forum===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are certain things, such as posting in a forum, that guests are never allowed to do, despite the permissions interface suggesting otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The guest role has some special functionality, for example when a guest user attempts to post in a forum, they obtain the message &amp;quot;Sorry, guests are not allowed to post. Would you like to log in now with a full user account?&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
(Note: If guests don&#039;t obtain the  &amp;quot;Sorry, guests are not allowed to post&amp;quot; message because they have no reply link, then self enrolment needs enabling in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you wish guests to be able to post in a forum, you can use the [[Forum poster role]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==User administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users can choose whether or not to track unread posts in their profile settings under &#039;Forum tracking&#039;. The settings are:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Yes: highlight new posts for me&lt;br /&gt;
* No: don&#039;t keep track of posts I have seen&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the user chooses &#039;Yes: highlight new posts for me&#039; and the forum administrator has set the &#039;Read tracking for this forum?&#039; to On or Optional then the user will have new posts highlighted for them. The posts will be highlighted in the following places:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* My home page&lt;br /&gt;
* Course page&lt;br /&gt;
* Within the forum itself&lt;br /&gt;
* In forum discussion threads&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:MoodleDocs forum_show_unread_behaviour.png|frame|center|Show unread on forum page]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The forum module has additional settings which may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039; and, for &#039;Maximum time to edit posts&#039;, in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Use email address in reply===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, a user&#039;s email is set as the &#039;From&#039; address for forum notifications (unless the user has hidden their email address in their profile) so that recipients can choose to reply personally rather than via the forum. To set noreply@yourmoodlesite.org as &#039;From&#039; address for all forum notification emails, untick the forum_replytouser checkbox.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Long and short posts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The long and short post setting determine how forum posts on the site front page, social format course pages, and user profiles are displayed. (Note: There is currently an unresolved issue - &amp;quot;Site news - forum length setting has no effect for certain users&amp;quot; - MDL-4781.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Enabling timed posts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Timed forum posts may be enabled i.e. having the option to set a display start and end date for a new discussion. Timed posts can then be created by users with the [[Capabilities/mod/forum:viewhiddentimedposts|capability to view hidden timed posts]] (normally admins and teachers).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum time to edit posts===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This specifies the amount of time people have to re-edit forum postings, glossary comments etc. Usually 30 minutes is a good value. The setting may be changed by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Security &amp;gt; Site policies&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Mark post read after &#039;X&#039; days===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is forum_oldpostdays and specifies the number of days after which any post is considered to be read. E.g. If this is set to 14 days then any post older than 14 days will be considered read. If you set this to 0 then &#039;&#039;&#039;ALL&#039;&#039;&#039; posts are instantly considered to be read. If you don&#039;t want any posts to be considered read without the user reading them then set a high figure (e.g. 1000) &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Forum konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un forum]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:フォーラムの追加/編集]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Forum_FAQ&amp;diff=107788</id>
		<title>Forum FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Forum_FAQ&amp;diff=107788"/>
		<updated>2014-03-27T12:28:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* How do I enable guests to post in a forum? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Forum}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are students unable to post in the forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most likely reason is that the forum is a [[News forum]] i.e. a special forum for general announcements which is automatically created for each course, and which by default only teachers and administrators can post in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a standard forum in which students can post, turn editing on for the course, click the &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link and then choose Forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students may also be unable to post to a forum where a [[Forum_settings#Common_module_settings|Group Mode]] other than &#039;No Groups&#039; has been used but the student is not a member of any group in the course.  They will see the message &amp;quot;Adding discussions to this forum requires group membership&amp;quot;.  In this case, either add the student to a [[Groups|group]] or change the [[Forum_settings#Common_module_settings|Group Mode]] to &#039;No Groups&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable students to rate forum posts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039; click the + symbol opposite the capability to rate posts and allow the role of student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not get ratings to work on my forums?==&lt;br /&gt;
Assuming you have followed the instructions above correctly and still cannot see ratings, then check you have json support enabled on your server. You can see this in &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Server&amp;gt;PHP info.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Json.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also this discussion:[ http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=170563]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I create a teacher-only forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher/tutor-only forum may be added to a course by creating a hidden forum. Teachers are able to view hidden course activities whereas students cannot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My users can&#039;t add attachments to my forum, either with drag and drop or with the file picker.==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check that in the forum settings that you have changed the maximum number of attachments allowed to a number greater than 0 ;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove the news forum from a course?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the news forum from the course homepage.&lt;br /&gt;
#In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039; set &amp;quot;News items to show&amp;quot; to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the Latest news block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove test messages from a new forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several options ([http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=95470 Here is a nice graphic]).  Remember you can &lt;br /&gt;
*Move the discussion/thread to another forum&lt;br /&gt;
*Edit the post with your moderator powers&lt;br /&gt;
*Delete the post with your moderator powers&lt;br /&gt;
*Split the thread at a particular post and move it to another thread &lt;br /&gt;
*Split&amp;gt;move&amp;gt;delete your test messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I set a display period for news forum announcements?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Timed posts are disabled by default, but the feature can be enabled by checking the &#039;&#039;forum_enabletimedposts&#039;&#039; checkbox in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039;. Timed posts can then be created by users with the [[Capabilities/mod/forum:viewhiddentimedposts|capability to view hidden timed posts]] (normally managers and teachers).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are email copies of forum posts not being sent?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most likely reason is that the cron is not set up. Please refer to the [[Cron|cron instructions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tips:&lt;br /&gt;
* Try the default settings in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Message outputs &amp;gt; Email&#039;&#039;. This generally works.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure that &#039;Allow user to select character set&#039; in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Message outputs &amp;gt; Email&#039;&#039; is set to No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can&#039;t students in separate groups reply to a forum discussion started by a teacher?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using groups, teachers are given the option of adding a new discussion topic for all participants or for a selected group. To enable students in separate groups to reply to a discussion, the teacher must copy and paste their discussion topic for each separate group, selecting each group from the dropdown menu at the top left of the forum page before clicking the &amp;quot;Add a new discussion topic&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable guests to post in a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s not possible to enable guests to post in a forum, though there is a workaround. Please see [[Forum poster role]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I close/archive a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
*You might want to do this if, for example, you want to put an end to a student discussion topic but still want them to be able to see posts which had been made without being able to reply any more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039; click the Prevent icon (X) for the student role for the capabilites &#039;Start new discussions&#039; and &#039;Reply to posts&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:forum-permissions-page1.gif|thumb|The screen and relevant capabilities. (Click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are a teacher in a course, you should be able to do this by default, but if you don&#039;t see these options, ask your admin to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the teacher role and change the capability moodle/role:safeoverride to allow&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the tab &amp;quot;Allow role overrides&amp;quot; (in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the appropriate box(s) in the teacher row to set which role(s) they can override. Most likely it will just be the student role, so check the box where the teacher row intersects with the student column&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I quarantine a forum post?==&lt;br /&gt;
If a student makes an inappropriate post, rather than deleting it, you can &amp;quot;quarantine&amp;quot; it by sending it to a hidden forum and then alerting your superior and the child&#039;s guardians. To do this you first need to create a forum &amp;quot;Hidden forum for Offensive Posts&amp;quot; (for example) and hide it with its eye.&lt;br /&gt;
**Find the offensive post and click &#039;split&#039; (between &#039;edit&#039; and &#039;delete&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
**This will take you to a second page where you will be asked to verify the split. Confirm it by pressing the &#039;split&#039; button near the top of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
**The post(s) will now be split. You should see the post/discussion individually on a separate page. In the right-hand corner will be a dropdown bar and a button that says &#039;move.&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
**Choose &#039;Hidden Forum for Offensive Posts&#039; in the dropdown and click &#039;move.&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure you inform the child why their post has been quarantined, as well as your superior and the child&#039;s guardians.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
(with thanks to Ben Reynolds)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Can I subscribe to just one discussion in a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not at present, though please see MDL-1626.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I receive forum emails in digest form?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A daily digest of either complete forum posts or with subjects only can be enabled in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; My profile settings &amp;gt; Edit profile&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I allow students to add new questions in a Q &amp;amp; A forum type?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only teachers and managers by default see the &amp;quot;add  a new question&amp;quot; button. If you wish students to be able to add new questions, they need to be given the capability [[Capabilities/mod/forum:addquestion|mod/forum:addquestion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I make sure my students are notified of forum posts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For students to be notified of forum posts, they need to be &#039;&#039;subscribed&#039;&#039; to the forum. A teacher can choose to force subscription on a particular forum either initially (auto subscription) or permanently (forced subscription) using the subscription mode setting. See the section on subscription mode in [[Forum settings]] for further details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher can also subscribe selected students to the forum via &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Show/edit current subscribers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change the &#039;From&#039; address for forum notifications sent via email?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, a user&#039;s email is set as the &#039;From&#039; address for forum notifications (unless the user has hidden their email address in their profile) so that recipients can choose to reply personally rather than via the forum. To set noreply@yourmoodlesite.org as &#039;From&#039; address for all forum notification emails, untick the forum_replytouser checkbox in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove the words &amp;quot;Site news&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the words to something else from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Forum administration&amp;gt;Edit settings&#039;&#039; but to have no words at all - and without touching the code - do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*As admin go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Appearance&amp;gt;HTML settings&#039;&#039; and uncheck/untick &#039;&#039;Remove HTML tags from all activity names&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Forum administration&amp;lt;Edit settings&#039;&#039; (for the site news) and type:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sitenewsname.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Save. What this does is code a space into the name field so Moodle thinks there is something in the required field -  but that something is a space,  not words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a teacher see all of a student&#039;s forum posts in a course?==&lt;br /&gt;
If a teacher clicks on the profile of a particular student, for example via the Participants link, they can then access a link &#039;&#039;Forum posts&#039;&#039; from the Navigation block. Expanding this link will offer the option either to see all posts or any discussions started by that student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:studentforumposts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a user see all their forum posts on Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
A user can view all their forum posts by going to the Navigation block and clicking &#039;&#039;My profile&amp;gt;Forum posts.&#039;&#039; Expanding this link will offer the option either to see all posts or any discussions started.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:seeallforumposts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=116 Forum module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=148055 Ability to post anonymously]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=178331 How to resend forum posts] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=196698 Discussion Count]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Forum FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ sur le forum]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Forum_poster_role&amp;diff=107787</id>
		<title>Forum poster role</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Forum_poster_role&amp;diff=107787"/>
		<updated>2014-03-27T12:27:16Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
The forum poster role is a highly restricted custom role which may be given to a visitor account to enable them to post in forums in a guest access course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that guests (ie, non-logged in users) are not able to post in forums even though the permissions suggest otherwise.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This role provides a workaround for situations where you have a course open to guests and you want to allow users not usually in your Moodle site to be able to contribute to discussions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that you first need to create an account to be used by any visitor, for example: username = &#039;&#039;visitor&#039;&#039; and password = &#039;&#039;visitor&#039;&#039; (or a password following your own restrictions)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.As an administrator, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles&#039;&#039; and click the &#039;Add a new role&#039; button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.On the next screen, ignore archetypes and presets and click &#039;Continue&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
3.Give the role a name and if desired a description and tick the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Course&amp;quot; context:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forumposter.png|center|]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.Click the &#039;Show advanced&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. In the filter, type &#039;&#039;forum&#039;&#039; and from the search results, set &#039;[[Capabilities/mod/forum:replypost|Reply to posts]]&#039;, &#039;[[Capabilities/mod/forum:startdiscussion|Start new discussions]]&#039; and &#039;[[Capabilities/mod/forum:viewdiscussion|View discussions]]&#039; to &#039;&#039;Allow&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. In the filter, type &#039;&#039;profile&#039;&#039; and from the search results, set [[Capabilities/moodle/user:editownprofile|Edit own profile]]&#039;, and &#039;[[Capabilities/moodle/user:viewdetails|View user profiles]]&#039;  and to &#039;&#039;Prohibit&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
7. In the filter, type &#039;&#039;password&#039;&#039; and from the search results, set &#039;[[Capabilities/moodle/user:changeownpassword|Change own password]]&#039; to &#039;&#039;Prohibit&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
8. You may, according to the needs of your organisation, want to restrict other capabilities too, for example sending messages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:forumpostercaps.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
9.Click the &#039;Create this role&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning the role to a visitor==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: All these steps must be done as an administrator:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#If you have not already done so, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Accounts&amp;gt;Add a new user&#039;&#039; and create an account which will be used by any visitor to your guest access course.&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Assign system roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#You should now see your newly created role here&lt;br /&gt;
#Assign the role to the visitor account user.&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to your the guest access course where you wish the visitor to contribute to forums.&lt;br /&gt;
#From &#039;&#039;Course administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;enrolled users&#039;&#039; select the &#039;forum poster&#039; role from the dropdown and give this role to your visitor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Information for users==&lt;br /&gt;
#If your course has guest access, then it will not be immediately obvious that the visitor must log in to post. It might be helpful to add a label at the top of the course page with the details of the visitor username and password.&lt;br /&gt;
#Remember to that visitor forum posts will all display the same name, so you could suggest in your explanatory note that they might wish (or not) to add their name when contributing.&lt;br /&gt;
#Note that this role is very restricted, as it simply allows posting in forums. Some activities such as Quiz and Wiki are no longer accessible once the visitor is logged in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{{Forum}}&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:forumpostercaps.png&amp;diff=107786</id>
		<title>File:forumpostercaps.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:forumpostercaps.png&amp;diff=107786"/>
		<updated>2014-03-27T12:26:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:forumposter.png&amp;diff=107785</id>
		<title>File:forumposter.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:forumposter.png&amp;diff=107785"/>
		<updated>2014-03-27T12:26:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=MNet&amp;diff=107784</id>
		<title>MNet</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=MNet&amp;diff=107784"/>
		<updated>2014-03-27T08:42:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: changed Settings to Administration&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Authentication}}&lt;br /&gt;
The Moodle network feature allows a Moodle administrator to establish a link with another Moodle or a Mahara site and to share some resources with the users of that Moodle. Users go from the first Moodle to the linked site via the [[Network servers block]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Networkserversexample.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Overview==&lt;br /&gt;
The initial release of MNet is bundled with a Authentication Plugin, which makes single-sign-on between Moodles possible. A user with the username &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;jody&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; logs in to her Moodle server as normal, and clicks on a link that takes her to a page on another Moodle server. Normally, she would have only the privileges of a guest on the remote Moodle, but behind the scenes, single-sign-on has established a fully authenticated session for Jody on the remote site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;WARNING:&#039;&#039;&#039;  MNet requires the use of &#039;&#039;&#039;xmlrpc&#039;&#039;&#039;. Please go to your phpinfo page if you are interested in using this and search for --with-xmlrpc.  If your php has not been compiled with xmlrpc then you need to address that first! At present it appears that PEAR xmlrpc will not work.&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Administration Block Users Authentication MoodleNetwork.jpg|thumb|MNet setting in &#039;&#039;Admin &amp;gt; User &amp;gt; Authentication &amp;gt; Moodle Network]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Security==&lt;br /&gt;
The MNet feature requires that your server has the &#039;&#039;&#039;Curl&#039;&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;&#039;OpenSSL&#039;&#039;&#039; extensions installed. Your system will generate a OpenSSL certificate for encrypted communication with other Moodles, and will rotate encryption keys on a monthly basis (approx).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Communication takes place over an XML-RPC transport, and the XML-RPC documents are wrapped first in an XMLDSIG (XML digital signature) envelope, and then in an XMLENC (XML encryption) envelope. The encryption all happens within PHP, and does not require an https (Apache SSL) server.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
References:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.w3.org/TR/xmldsig-core/ XML Digital Signatures]&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://www.w3.org/TR/xmlenc-core/ XML Encryption]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A special mode can be enabled which would allow a machine with a specified IP address to make calls to the XML-RPC layer without using either encryption or signature envelopes. This mode is provided to enable Moodle to communicate with other software systems in which the integration of signatures and encryption might be prohibitively difficult. It is not envisioned that unencrypted inter-Moodle networking will ever be enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Peer to Peer Network==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is the basic layout of the system. It can be very useful to run one Moodle per faculty or departments, each with its own user management, and yet permit users to roam across the Moodle installs... subject to permissions of course. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The instructions will cover 2 Moodle installations: MoodleA and MoodleB. Both are installed correctly and have never had a Moodle Network configuration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: If you experience problems, ensure debugging is turned on in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Debugging&#039;&#039;. Extra diagnostic messages may be displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You need to first enable Networking in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Advanced Features&#039;&#039;. This will add the &amp;quot;Networking&amp;quot; menu to the Site Administration menu.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Get them to talk to each other&lt;br /&gt;
## Ensure &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Environment&#039;&#039; indicates you have curl installed&lt;br /&gt;
## If MoodleA and MoodleB are hosted in the same domain, ensure they have a different cookie prefix. Note that changing the cookie prefix will log you out! You can change the cookie prefix via &#039;&#039;Admin &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Session Handling&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
## On both, go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Network &amp;gt; Settings&#039;&#039; and turn Networking ON.&lt;br /&gt;
## On MoodleA go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Network &amp;gt; Manage peers&#039;&#039; - put the URL of MoodleB under &amp;quot;Add New Host&amp;quot; and click Add. The URL should include the directory where your Moodle code is located and may include the protocol as well, for example &#039;&#039;https://www.mymoodle.org/moodle&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
## Do the equivalent on MoodleB.&lt;br /&gt;
# Get user roaming going&lt;br /&gt;
[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=141491] ). On both servers: &lt;br /&gt;
### Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Authentication &amp;gt; Manage authentication&#039;&#039;. Enable &#039;&#039;MNet Authentication&#039;&#039; by clicking the &#039;enable&#039; icon.&lt;br /&gt;
## On MoodleA go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Networking &amp;gt; (Manage) Peers&#039;&#039;, click on &#039;MoodleB&#039;, and click on the &#039;Services&#039; tab. Enable SSO-IDP (SSO Identity Provider) publish and subscribe, and SSO-SP (SSO Service Provider) publish and subscribe.&lt;br /&gt;
## Do the equivalent on MoodleB. (By both publishing and subscribing you allow users to move freely between the two servers. By only publishing or subscribing between servers you create a one way traversal)&lt;br /&gt;
## On both, go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define Roles&#039;&#039;, only roles that have &amp;quot;Roam to a remote Moodle moodle/site:mnetlogintoremote&amp;quot; will be allowed to roam. Grant the privilege as appropriate.&lt;br /&gt;
### eg. enabling for &#039;&#039;Authenticated user&#039;&#039; allows any authenticated user to roam between servers.&lt;br /&gt;
## On both servers, go to the homepage, and add the &#039;Network Servers&#039; block.&lt;br /&gt;
## To test, it is recommended to use a different browser (even on a different machine) that is logged in to neither. Login to MoodleA with a non-administrator account that has the permissions to roam. You should see the Network Servers block, and clicking on it you should go to MoodleB with a newly autocreated account. &lt;br /&gt;
# Get remote enrolments going -- this is optional. It allows an administrator of MoodleB to enrol users that are &amp;quot;native&amp;quot; to MoodleB in remote courses in MoodleA, and viceversa.&lt;br /&gt;
## On both, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins&#039;&#039; and enable Moodle Network enrolment plugin (click Save). Click on &#039;Edit&#039; and enable &#039;allow_allcourses&#039; or select some courses or categories to be remotely enrolled.&lt;br /&gt;
## On the server you want to receive enrolments:&lt;br /&gt;
### Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins&#039;&#039;. Enable &#039;&#039;MNet remote enrolments&#039;&#039; by clicking the &#039;enable&#039; icon. (For &#039;&#039;MNet remote enrolments&#039;&#039; settings info see [[MNet_remote_enrolments|MNet remote enrolments]])&lt;br /&gt;
## On MoodleA go to &#039;&#039;Admin &amp;gt; Network &amp;gt; Peers&#039;&#039;, click on &#039;MoodleB&#039;, and click on the &#039;Services&#039; tab. Enable Enrolment publish and/or subscribe.&lt;br /&gt;
## Do the equivalent on MoodleB.&lt;br /&gt;
## On every course you want to allow enrolments into:&lt;br /&gt;
### Enter course and go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Enrolment methods&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
### From &#039;&#039;Add method&#039;&#039; drop-down select &#039;&#039;MNet remote enrolments&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
### On the new screen select the &#039;&#039;Remote host&#039;&#039; you want to allow enrolments from, the Role for the enrolled users, and click save. (Note: you can only add a single &#039;&#039;MNet remote enrolments&#039;&#039; method per course.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using it===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In MoodleA go to &#039;&#039;Admin &amp;gt; Networking &amp;gt; Remote enrolments client&#039;&#039;. You will see MoodleB listed. Click on &#039;&#039;Edit enrolments&#039;&#039; button beside MoodleB and you will see a list of courses that MoodleB offers for remote enrolment. Click &#039;Edit enrolments&#039;&#039;, select the users you want to enroll, and then click Add to enroll them in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Connecting to a Mnet hub==&lt;br /&gt;
A Mnet hub (do not confuse it with the [[Community hub]]) is a Moodle server that is configured to accept connections from other Moodle servers, and to provide a set of services to users of these other servers. This guideline will direct you to connect to a Mnet hub, assess the services it has to offer, and enable those services for your users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
# Get talking to the Hub&lt;br /&gt;
## Ensure that the &#039;&#039;Admin &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Environment&#039;&#039; page indicates you have curl and openssl installed&lt;br /&gt;
## Go to &#039;&#039;Admin &amp;gt; Network &amp;gt; Settings&#039;&#039; and turn Networking on&lt;br /&gt;
## Go to &#039;&#039;Admin &amp;gt; Network &amp;gt; Peers&#039;&#039; and enter the URL of Mnet Hub under &amp;quot;Add New Host&amp;quot;. Click &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Add&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## The host details for the Mnet Hub should appear with the Site Name field already populated. Click &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Save changes&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## The details will be written to your database and two new tabs will appear in this window: &#039;Services&#039; and &#039;Logs&#039;. Click &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Services&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
##A list of services will appear, each with a checkbox for &#039;publish&#039; and &#039;subscribe&#039;. Check the checkboxes for any services you want to publish or subscribe to&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Using it===&lt;br /&gt;
If the Mnet Hub has already enabled a service for you, there will be a tick alongside the appropriate checkbox, for example: if the Hub is &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;publishing&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; Moodle Networked Enrolment, then a tick will appear alongside the &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;subscribe&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; checkbox for this service. Note that in order to enable some functionality, prominently &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;single-sign-on&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;, you may have to &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;publish&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; a service, e.g. the &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Identity Provider&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; service. The Mnet Hub will access this service on your Moodle, asking it to authenticate your users.&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable Roaming&lt;br /&gt;
## Subscribe to &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;SSO (Service Provider)&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; by checking the box&lt;br /&gt;
## Publish &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;SSO (Identity Provider)&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; by checking the box&lt;br /&gt;
## Click &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Save changes&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Go to &#039;&#039;Admin &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define Roles&#039;&#039;, and grant the capability &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Roam to a remote Moodle moodle/site:mnetlogintoremote&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; to an appropriate role&lt;br /&gt;
## Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Authentication &amp;gt; Manage authentication&#039;&#039; and enable the &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Moodle Network authentication&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; plugin&lt;br /&gt;
## Go to your homepage, turn on editing, and add the &#039;Network Servers&#039; block&lt;br /&gt;
## Using a different web-browser, log on as a non-admin user who inhabits the role you granted the roaming capability to&lt;br /&gt;
## Note that the Mnet Hub is listed in the Network Servers block on the homepage. Click on the link to that server&lt;br /&gt;
## Some of your user details will be transferred to the Mnet Hub server, and a browsing session will be started for you as if you had logged on there directly&lt;br /&gt;
# Enable Networked Enrolment&lt;br /&gt;
## Return to the web browser you&#039;ve been using as the site administrator&lt;br /&gt;
## Go to &#039;&#039;Admin &amp;gt; Network &amp;gt; Peers&#039;&#039; and click on the entry for the Mnet Hub.&lt;br /&gt;
## Click on the Services tab&lt;br /&gt;
## Subscribe to &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Moodle Networked Enrolment&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Enrolments &amp;gt; Manage enrol plugins&#039;&#039; and enable the &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Moodle Network enrolment&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; plugin. Click &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Save changes&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
## Click on &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;edit&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; to view the details for networked enrolments.&lt;br /&gt;
## Go to &#039;&#039;Admin &amp;gt; Networking &amp;gt; Enrolments&#039;&#039; to see a list of Moodle servers that offer this service to you&lt;br /&gt;
## Click on a server name to view a list of courses that the server offers to your users&lt;br /&gt;
## Click on a course name, to view a list users that you can enrol in this course&lt;br /&gt;
## Enrol users&lt;br /&gt;
## Profit!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Running a Mnet hub==&lt;br /&gt;
A Mnet hub is a regular Moodle site that runs in a special mode. As a Moodle Administrator, when you add another Moodle site to your list of network peers, your Moodle will contact that site to find out what it is called, and to request its public key for encrypted communication. Normally, the remote server will simply provide this information without making any record of the transaction.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A Mnet hub is different. As soon as you add an entry for a Mnet hub to your system, the Mnet hub will create an entry for your server in its list of hosts, and may immediately begin to offer services to the users of your site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This section will guide you to set up a Mnet hub, and select services to offer to all comers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Setup===&lt;br /&gt;
Enable Networking&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure that the &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; Environment&#039;&#039; page indicates you have curl and openssl installed&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Network &amp;gt; Settings&#039;&#039; and turn Networking on &lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Network &amp;gt; Peers&#039;&#039; and tick the checkbox for &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Register all hosts&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;. Click on &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Save Changes&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# On the same page, the first entry in your list of hosts should be &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;All hosts&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt;. Click this link&lt;br /&gt;
# Click on &amp;lt;em&amp;gt;Services&amp;lt;/em&amp;gt; and enable any services you want to offer to all comers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Moodle Network FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Upload users]] for csv upload using the &#039;&#039;mnethostid&#039;&#039; field.&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Development:Moodle Network|Moodle Network development notes]]&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=6976 MNet forum]&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=92749 Examples of how people are using Moodle networks] forum discussion&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Enrolment]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:MNet]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Réseau Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:Moodleネットワーク]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Red Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[cs:Síťové služby]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Moodle-Netzwerk]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Assignment_settings&amp;diff=107782</id>
		<title>Assignment settings</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Assignment_settings&amp;diff=107782"/>
		<updated>2014-03-26T09:43:39Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Assignment}}&lt;br /&gt;
&amp;lt;p class=&amp;quot;note&amp;quot;&amp;gt;&#039;&#039;&#039;Note&#039;&#039;&#039;: This page describes settings for the new Assignment module in Moodle 2.3 onwards. For documentation on Assignments (2.2) settings, see [https://docs.moodle.org/22/en/Assignment_settings Assignment settings] in the 2.2 docs.&amp;lt;/p&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding and editing an Assignment activity==&lt;br /&gt;
*To add a new Assignment activity to your course, login with the appropriate access rights (e.g.editing teacher, course creator or administrator) and Turn Editing On. Within the required Week or Topic Block click Add and Activity or Resource link. &lt;br /&gt;
*In the Add an activity or resource dialogue box that appears, select Assignment and click Add.&lt;br /&gt;
*To edit an existing Assignment activity, login to your course with the appropriate access rights (e.g. editing teacher, course creator or administrator) and Turn Editing On. Select the Update icon against the relevant Assignment item.&lt;br /&gt;
*Alternatively, after logging into your course simply click on the name of the Assignment activity you wish to edit and then click the Edit Settings link under Assignment administration within the Settings block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available when creating or editing/updating any Assignment activity. Only General,Availability and Submission types are open by default;the others are collapsed. To expand everything, click the &amp;quot;Expand all&amp;quot; link top right. &lt;br /&gt;
Click on any screenshot to see it full size.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==General ==&lt;br /&gt;
The General section allows you to give your assignment a name and description. &lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:AssignGeneral.png|thumb|General settings for an assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Assignment name===&lt;br /&gt;
Give your Assignment a name (e.g. “Report on Topic 1 Content”). The title entered here will be the name that learners see in the course content area. Learners will click on this name to view the details of the assignment and, if applicable, submit their work.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Description===&lt;br /&gt;
Provide instructions for your students here so they are clear what they have to do. &lt;br /&gt;
Click &amp;quot;Show editing tools&amp;quot; to display the rich text editor and drag the bottom right of the text box out to expand it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can also provide information or resources related to the assignment, such as a video clip, an image, or a link to a webpage.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Display description on course page===&lt;br /&gt;
Enabling this will display the description on the course page just below the link to the assignment activity.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Availability==&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:AssignAvailability.png|thumb|Availability settings for an assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
===Allow submissions from===&lt;br /&gt;
The Allow submissions from setting prevents students from submitting their assignment before the shown date. A teacher can to set a day, month, year and time (24 hour clock) from which learners can begin to submit their assignments. Please note that this setting does not hide the activity from the learners. Instead, the learner will see the activity, be able to view the instructions and use any materials you have included in the description, but the learner will not be able to submit or complete the assignment until the Allow submissions from date.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is enabled (ticked/checked) by default and is set at the day and time you added the assignment. To disable this, remove the tick/check.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Due date===&lt;br /&gt;
The Due date setting establishes when the assignment is due. Submissions will still be allowed after this date, but any assignments submitted after this date are marked as late.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows an teacher to set a day, month, year and time (24 hour clock) before which learners must submit their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default the Due date is Enabled (ticked) and is set at 7 days ahead of the day and time you selected Add Assignment. To disable this feature, simply ensure the Enable checkbox is not marked. For more information on using the Due Date see [[Assignment FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note: Assignments without a Due date will appear on the My home page with “No Due date” displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Cut-off date===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The Cut-off date is the date beyond which students will not be able to send in their assignment as the button for doing so will no longer be displayed. After that date (or time) a teacher may, on request, grant an extension by going to the class assignment grading screen, clicking the &amp;quot;Edit&amp;quot; column and choosing &amp;quot;grant extension&amp;quot; for the relevant student. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, see this Youtube screencast [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UaL0LzZwyYI&amp;amp;feature=share&amp;amp;list=UUCRg_EbhU9tdpLdiGGN1Mgg Assignment Extensions]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Always show description===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting is used in conjunction with the Allow submissions from setting. If it is set to Yes, the assignment Description will become visible to students at the Allow submissions from date. If it is set to No, the assignment Description will be hidden from students until the Allow submissions from date, only the assignment Name will be displayed as shown in the screenshot below. (Click to see full size.)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:always show description.jpg|thumb|Always show description]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If Allow submissions from is disabled, then this setting has no meaning: the assignment description will always be visible to students.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:SubmissionTypes.png|thumb|Select the type of submission here]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide how you wish students to submit their work to you.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Online text===&lt;br /&gt;
Learners can type their response directly in Moodle using the text editor.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===File submissions===&lt;br /&gt;
Learners can upload and edit one or more files of any type the teacher can  open.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Submission comments===&lt;br /&gt;
If enabled, students may leave comments into a text area associated with the assignment. Comments can be used for communication with the grading person, assignment progress description, to let students alert the marker about which file is the master file (in case of inter-linked files), or any other type of communication between student and marker. (Note that if Blind marking is enabled, student comments display as from &amp;quot;Participant 01 etc&amp;quot; to avoid revealing identities.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Submission comments will appear in the grading table (click on the assignment activity, then click on the View/Grade all Submission button), in the Submission comments column. Submission comments allow two-way communication between the student and teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum number of uploaded files===&lt;br /&gt;
Here you can decide the maximum number of files which may be uploaded by each learner. (It might be helpful to display the number in the assignment description.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum submission size===&lt;br /&gt;
This setting specifies the maximum size per file of each of the files that the students can upload as part of their submission. This maximum upload size may only be equal to or less than the course limit (which in turn may only be equal to or less than the site limit). The maximum size of each file is displayed to students at the point where they upload files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submission comments.jpg|thumb|Submission comments]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:maximum file size.jpg|thumb|Maximum file size]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Feedback types==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedbacktypes.png|thumb|Feedback types]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback comments===&lt;br /&gt;
Setting this to yes means that markers can leave feedback comments for each submission. It enables the Feedback Comments column in the grading table.(To access the grading table, click on the assignment activity and then &#039;&#039;View/Grade all Submissions&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback comments are also accessible by clicking on the green tick in the grade column on the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback comments.jpg|thumb|The Feedback comments column]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[FIle:feedback comments 2.jpg|thumb|Type feedback comments into the box]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offline grading worksheet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If set to yes, the teacher will have a link to download the grading list as a spreadsheet. They will then be able to enter grades and feedback comments offline:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:emptygradebook.png|thumb|The empty gradebook on Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:downloadgradingworksheet.png|thumb|The dropdown to download the list]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:excelgrades.png|thumb|Editing the grades offline]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When the teacher has completed their grading offline, they can then upload the spreadsheet, confirm the changes and the grades and comments will be transferred over into Moodle&#039;s gradebook:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Offline_grading_upload.png|thumb|Starting the upload process]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:uploadgradingworksheet.png|thumb|Uploading the grading worksheet]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:confirmchanges.png|thumb|Confirming the changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:fullgradebook.png|thumb|Grades and feedback transferred into Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also [http://www.somerandomthoughts.com/blog/2012/11/19/offline-grading-worksheet-in-moodle-2-4-assignment/ Offline grading worksheet] blog post by Gavin Henrick.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback files===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows  markers to upload files with feedback when marking. These files may be the marked up student assignments, documents with comments, a completed marking guide, or spoken audio feedback. It enables the Feedback Files column in the grading table. (To access the  grading table click on the assignment activity and then &#039;&#039;View/Grade all Submissions&#039;&#039;)To upload feedback files, click on the green tick in the grade column on the grading table and then upload either with drag and drop or using the [[File picker]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Feedback is displayed to students on the assignment submission page. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback files.jpg|thumb|The Feedback files column]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback files 2.jpg|thumb|Upload files here]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:feedback view for students.jpg|thumb|Student view with comments and file feedback both enabled]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
====Uploading multiple feedback files====&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It is also possible to upload multiple feedback files as a zip, from the dropdown above the grading list:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Download the students&#039; assignments using the &amp;quot;Download all submissions&amp;quot; link from the same dropdown menu;&lt;br /&gt;
#Extract the folder offline and add your comments to the student&#039;s submissions.Keep the names the same.&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the students&#039; submissions and zip them into a new folder. Important: Don&#039;t just edit them inside their original folder and re-zip this; it will not work. The folder name does not matter as long as the feedback files have the same names as before.&lt;br /&gt;
#Upload this newly zipped folder.&lt;br /&gt;
#You will be presented with a confirmation screen displaying your feedback files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:mutiplefeedbackzip.png|thumb|Choose from the dropdown menu]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:multiplezip1.png|thumb|Confirmation screen displaying the feedback files to be uploaded]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:multiplezip2.png|thumb|Screen confirming uploaded feedback]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039;If you zip files on a Mac, you may get a folder included in the zip called _MACOSX_ which needs to be removed otherwise moodle will not recognise the changes in the files.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Submission settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submissionsettings.png|thumb|Submission settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Require students click submit button===&lt;br /&gt;
Students can upload draft versions of the assignment until such time as they are ready to submit.Once they click the submit button they indicate to the teacher that they have finished working on the assignment. In earlier versions of Moodle this was called &#039;&#039;&amp;quot;Send for marking&amp;quot;&#039;&#039;.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can then longer edit their submission. If they need to change it, they must ask the teacher who can revert the assignment to draft status.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To revert to the draft stage, click on the assignment activity and then View/Grade all Submissions. Locate the student and click the action icon in the Edit column. Select Revert the submission to draft.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is No, then students do not have to to click a submit button and are able to make changes to uploaded files at any time.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is No but the teacher wishes to grade students work, then you can stop students from making further changes by using Prevent submission changes. Prevent submission changes can also be used in cases where students have neglected to click the Submit button and grading has commenced.&lt;br /&gt;
To prevent submission changes, click on the assignment activity, then click on the View/Grade all submissions button. On the grading table, locate the student and click the action icon in the Edit column. Select Prevent submission changes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do either of these with a number of students, use the &#039;&#039;With selected&#039;&#039; menu at the bottom of the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:revert to draft.jpg|thumb|Reverting to draft]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:prevent submission changes.jpg|thumb|Prevent submission changes]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:with selected.jpg|thumb|&amp;quot;With selected&amp;quot;..]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To do either of these with a number of students, use the &#039;&#039;With selected&#039;&#039; menu at the bottom of the grading table.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require that students accept the Submission statement===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can define a &amp;quot;Submission statement&amp;quot;, ie, a statement where students promise the work is their own and which they must agree to before submitting their work. This may be done via &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity modules&amp;gt;Assignment.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If preferred, the available default statement which may be used instead: &#039;&#039;This assignment is my own work, except where I have acknowledged the use of the works of other people&#039;&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has given teachers the option of using a submission statement or not, then it will be available in the assignment settings screen. The section [[#Submission_Statement]] explains how an administrator can set this up.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details, see this blog post [http://ourlearning.co.uk/2012/10/moodle-assignment-all-my-own-work/ &amp;quot;All my own work&amp;quot;]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When this setting is enabled, students will have to check a button before they can submit their assignment:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the administrator has forced the statement throughout the site, a teacher will not have this option in the settings but a student will see the statement when accessing their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Attempts reopened===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
This setting allows the teacher to decide how submissions are reopened. The default is &amp;quot;Never&amp;quot;, in that students may only submit once. However, a teacher can set this to &amp;quot;Manually&amp;quot; and reopen it themselves for the student to resubmit, or to &amp;quot;Automatically until pass&amp;quot;. The student must then keep trying and resubmitting until they get a pass grade. [[Grade_items#Activity-based_grade_items|Passing grades]] are set in the Gradebook. &#039;&#039;(Note that for this you need to set the assignment so that students have to click &#039;submit for marking&#039;. If not, then, unless you manually lock a student&#039;s assignment, then they can continue to edit it for as long as they like.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Maximum attempts===&lt;br /&gt;
{{New features}}&lt;br /&gt;
If a student is allowed to resubmit, this setting will determine how many times they can resubmit before they are no longer allowed to do so. (For example, if a student has to keep trying until they get a pass grade, the teacher might decide that ten attempts is enough even though they have not yet passed!)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Groups submission settings==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:groupsubmissionsettings.png|thumb|Group submission settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Students submit in groups===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this box is ticked, then students are able to collaborate on an assignment. This might involve for example, working in the same online text area, or one student uploading an MS Powerpoint which another student downloads, improves and re-uploads to the common assignment area.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When grading, the teacher may choose to give a common grade and feedback to all students in the group or to give individual grades and feedback to each member.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If no groups have been made, then Moodle will make a default group of every student in the course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details see this Youtube video [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=G16gYZJFCrM&amp;amp;feature=share&amp;amp;list=UUCRg_EbhU9tdpLdiGGN1Mgg Group Assignment 2.4]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require all group members submit===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This setting will only appear if the teacher has ticked the &amp;quot;Require students click submit button&amp;quot; earlier. The assignment will not be classed as &amp;quot;submitted&amp;quot; until all members of the group have made a contribution. When one student has submitted, the other members of the group will be able to see who still has to submit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grouping for student groups===&lt;br /&gt;
If a particular grouping is selected here, then the gradebook will display any other groups and non-grouped students in the &amp;quot;default group&amp;quot;, while naming the group(s) that are in the chosen grouping. If &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; is selected, then the gradebook will display the names of all groups and put any non-grouped students in the &amp;quot;default group&amp;quot;. See this [https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=216399#p942913 forum post on grouping for student groups] for examples of how this might be used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Notifications==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:notifications25.png|thumb|Notifications]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
===Notify graders about submissions===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers will receive a message (of a type they choose) whenever a student submits an assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
===Notify graders about late submission===&lt;br /&gt;
Teachers will receive a message (of a type they choose)whenever a student submits a late assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Grade==&lt;br /&gt;
(This setting is collapsed by default)&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:grade25.png|thumb|Grade]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade===&lt;br /&gt;
Specify the maximum grade or [[Scales|Scale]] to be applied to the assignment.  If you will not be giving a grade for the assignment, choose No Grade.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grading method===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are 3 options:&lt;br /&gt;
* Simple direct grading (entering a grade or scale item)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Marking guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rubric]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Grade Category===&lt;br /&gt;
Any custom [[Grade_categories|Grade Categories]] that have been created within your site or course will be listed here and will be available for selection.  Select the required Grade Category to add this assignment as a [[Grade_items|Grade item]] within this Category.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Blind marking===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If this setting is enabled, then a teacher will not see the names of students who have submitted their assignments. Instead, they will see randomly generated Participant numbers. (The student view of the assignment does not change.) This is also the case if student comments have been enabled. Once they have graded the assignment, it is however possible for teachers to see who submitted what by clicking on &amp;quot;Reveal student identities&amp;quot; in the Assignment settings.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Returning Marks to Students ===&lt;br /&gt;
Because of the nature of blind marking, the students cannot see the final grade until all of the students names have been revealed.  This is found in Assignment Settings &amp;gt; Reveal Student Names.  However, feedback comments will appear.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Note:&#039;&#039; Beacuse of this, the  level of anonymity might not suit the privacy requirements of your establishment. See this tracker entry MDL-35390 - &amp;quot;Blind Marking is not so blind&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For more details on this feature, see this Youtube video [http://youtu.be/Biiw3E13mgM Blind marking in 2.4].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Common module settings==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Common module settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Restrict access settings==&lt;br /&gt;
The [[Restrict_access_settings|Restrict access]] area becomes visible in Moodle activities and resource settings if [[Conditional_activities|Conditional Activities]] have been enabled.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Locally assigned roles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Assignment administration &amp;gt; Locally assigned roles&#039;&#039; selected users can be given additional roles in the activity. See the Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=98208 Custom role for &#039;Course Monitor&#039;] forum discussion for an example.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assignment capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:exportownsubmission|Export own submission]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:grade|Grade assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:submit|Submit assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/mod/assign:view|View assignment]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Role permissions for the activity can be changed in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Assignment administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Site administration settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available for an administrator under &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Assignment&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback plugin===&lt;br /&gt;
The comments that are pushed to the gradebook from the assignment are limited to a single text only comment. An Administrator can specify which of the feedback plugins will be push comments to the gradebook. On a standard Moodle install the choices are &amp;quot;Feedback comments&amp;quot; (default) or &amp;quot;Feedback file&amp;quot; but there may be additional options if your Moodle install contains additional feedback plugins.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Show recent submissions===&lt;br /&gt;
This option allows everyone to see notifications of submissions in [[Recent activity]] reports and the Recent Activity Block, within a course context.  Note that the default for this option is No which means students will not be able to see when classmates have submitted or updated any Assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Send submission receipt to students===&lt;br /&gt;
This switch will enable submission receipts for students. Students will receive a notification every time they successfully submit an assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:ass_settings.jpg|thumb|Submission receipts settings]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Submission Statement===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can enter text in the box here which will appear when students are about to submit their assignment. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:newsubmissionstatement.png|thumb|Admin view of Submission statement set up screen - click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:submissionstatement.png|thumb|Student view when about to submit - click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Require that students accept the Submission statement===&lt;br /&gt;
If this is enabled then every assignment on the site will display the statement for students to agree to. The option will not appear in the assignment settings for a teacher.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If it is left as the default &amp;quot;No&amp;quot;, then teachers will have the choice within their own assignments to force this or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following configuration options are available for an administrator under &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Assignment plugins&#039;&#039;. There are two main sections &#039;&#039;Submission plugins&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Feedback plugins&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Submission plugins===&lt;br /&gt;
====File submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Maximum submission size&#039;&#039;&#039; An Administrator can specify the maximum size of any individual file uploaded within the assignment module across all courses on the site. This limit may be equal to or less than course file upload limit.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Online text submissions====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====Submission comments====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Feedback plugins===&lt;br /&gt;
====Feedback comments====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
====File feedback====&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this submission method will be enabled by default for all new assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Offline grading worksheet===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;Enabled by default&#039;&#039;&#039; If set, this will be enabled by default for all new assignments&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:24assignmentfeedbackplugins.png|thumb|Managing assignment feedback plugins]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
Synergy Learning blog post: [http://www.synergy-learning.com/moodle-2-5-improvements-assignment-resubmissions/ Assignment resubmissions]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Aufgabe konfigurieren]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Ajouter/modifier un devoir]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:課題を追加/編集する]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grading_forms_publisher&amp;diff=107781</id>
		<title>Grading forms publisher</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grading_forms_publisher&amp;diff=107781"/>
		<updated>2014-03-25T11:28:20Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Assigning the role to a teacher */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
The custom role of Grading forms publisher allows a user to share advanced grading forms (such as rubrics) as a template for others to use. They can also edit and remove their own templates. &#039;&#039;(If you want a user to be able to edit and remove templates created by other users as well as their own, then see the custom role, [[Grading forms manager]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new role==&lt;br /&gt;
#As an administrator, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles&#039;&#039; and  click the &#039;Add a new role&#039; button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the next screen, ignore archetypes and presets and click &#039;Continue&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Give the role a name and if desired a description and tick the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; context:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradingformpublisher.png|center|thumb|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.In the filter, type &amp;quot;grading form&amp;quot; to quickly display the capabilities of &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:managesharedforms&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:sharegradingforms&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.Set &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:sharegradingforms&#039;&#039; to &#039;allow&#039; but leave &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:managesharedforms&#039;&#039; as default &#039;not set&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradingformcapabilitiespublisher.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Click the &#039;Create this role&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning the role to a teacher==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#As an administrator, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Assign system roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#You should now see your newly created role here&lt;br /&gt;
#Assign the role to the required course teacher(s).&#039;&#039;(Note that the users still need to have the teacher role in their courses.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sharing and using other templates==&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Assignment administration&amp;gt;Advanced grading&#039;&#039;, a Grading forms publisher can save a new form and then publish as a template for others:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:publishastemplate.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can also create a new form from a shared template by selecting &#039;Use this template&#039; at the bottom of the screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:publisher.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Grades]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grading_forms_manager&amp;diff=107780</id>
		<title>Grading forms manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grading_forms_manager&amp;diff=107780"/>
		<updated>2014-03-25T11:27:53Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* Assigning the role to a teacher */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
The custom role of Grading forms manager allows a user to share advanced grading forms (such as rubrics) as a template for others to use. It also allows them to edit and remove templates others have shared as well as their own. &#039;&#039;(If you only wish a user to share and manage their own templates, and not those others have created, then see the custom role [[Grading forms publisher]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new role==&lt;br /&gt;
#As an administrator, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles&#039;&#039; and  click the &#039;Add a new role&#039; button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the next screen, ignore archetypes and presets and click &#039;Continue&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Give the role a name and if desired a description and tick the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; context:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradingformmanager.png|center|thumb|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.In the filter, type &amp;quot;grading form&amp;quot; to quickly display the capabilities of &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:managesharedforms&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:sharegradingforms&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.Set both capabilities to &#039;allow&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradingformcapabilitiesmanager.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Click the &#039;Create this role&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning the role to a teacher==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#As an administrator, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Assign system roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#You should now see your newly created role here&lt;br /&gt;
#Assign the role to the required course teacher(s).(&#039;&#039;Note that the users still need to have the teacher role in their courses.)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing templates==&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Assignment administration&amp;gt;Advanced grading&#039;&#039;, a Grading forms manager can create a new form and publish it as a template for others to use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:publishastemplate.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They also have the option of both using or deleting a shared  template from the bottom of the screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manager.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Grades]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Blocks_FAQ&amp;diff=107777</id>
		<title>Blocks FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Blocks_FAQ&amp;diff=107777"/>
		<updated>2014-03-21T12:36:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* How do I make a block in my course visible to teachers but not students? */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Blocks}}&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I hide front page blocks from non-logged-in users?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Turn editing on&amp;quot; button at the top-right of the front page. (You need to be logged in as an administrator.)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the assign roles icon (often a face and mask) in the header of the block to be hidden. (&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Don&#039;t worry if you get an error message saying you are not able to assign roles ;) )&lt;br /&gt;
# Scroll down to the settings block and click the Permissions link&lt;br /&gt;
# [[File:Blockassign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &#039;&#039;View block&#039;&#039; section, click the X next to &#039;&#039;Guest&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get rid of a link in &amp;quot;Site Pages&amp;quot; in the Navigation block?==&lt;br /&gt;
When a resource or activity (like a page, file or forum) is added to the [[Main menu block]]  on the front page, it will appear in the Site Pages of the Navigation block. If you need the item but don&#039;t want it to display then go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Appearance&amp;gt;Navigation&#039;&#039; and uncheck &amp;quot;show front page activities in the navigation&amp;quot;. If you no longer want the item then turn on the editing on the front page, go to or add the [[Main menu block]] and click to delete the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I make a front page block visible to teachers but not students?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to control who sees block on the front page. The following applies to any specified group of people, not just teachers and students.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure you have hidden your block  from non-logged in users as  in the instructions above.&lt;br /&gt;
# In  &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles&#039;&#039;, click on &amp;quot;authenticated user on the front page&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the context type, select &amp;quot;block&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
# Set &#039;&#039;moodle/block:view&#039;&#039; to &amp;quot;allow&amp;quot;. Save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn editing on on your front page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;assign roles &amp;quot; icon on your block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the blue words of &amp;quot;authenticated user on the front page&amp;quot; to access the screen where you can choose who you want to allow to see this block (such as your teachers) by moving them from the right hand box to the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Now click &amp;quot;Permissions&amp;quot; in the Administration block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the X next to &amp;quot;authenticated user&amp;quot; to prevent them viewing this block.&lt;br /&gt;
#From now on, regular authenticated users will not be able to see the block. However, those who have been given the role of &amp;quot;authenticated user on the front page&amp;quot; will be able to see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I make a block in my course visible to teachers but not students?==&lt;br /&gt;
Here are two suggestions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.Add a block to a page which only teachers can see, for example &#039;&#039;/grade/report/grader/index.php&#039;&#039; You could add a comments block for teachers to discuss and moderate each others&#039; grades. Alternatively,you could add an HTML block to  &#039;&#039;/badges/index.php&#039;&#039; with badge issuing policies. A block may also be added to &#039;&#039;enrol/users.php&#039;&#039; for notes or comments regarding enrolments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.Add a block to the main course page and ask your administrator to go to &#039;&#039;Block&amp;gt;Assign roles&amp;gt;Permissions&#039;&#039; and prevent authenticated users and students from viewing the block. (A regular teacher cannot change permissions of authenticated users.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change a Block item name from a list inside a block?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can change an item name in  &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site Administration &amp;gt; Language&amp;gt; Language customization&#039;&#039; Select the &#039;moodle.php&#039; file then search for the words you need to alter.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to I make a block &amp;quot;sticky&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Block settings]]. Using the edit icon in the block heading, go to the configuration page.  Look for the &amp;quot;Where this block appears&amp;quot; group and &amp;quot;Display on page types&amp;quot;.  Depending upon your current context and permissions, you will see different options.  One maybe &amp;quot;All pages&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Any type of course main page&amp;quot;, and others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Where did that block come from?  I do not want it!==&lt;br /&gt;
Your site administrator or some one with more permissions than you decided that block should be there. It is possible to force a block to appear on other pages.  For example, a site administrator my force a HTML block on every main course page and determine where it will be, so they may put site messages there.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your site administrator can tell where every instance of a block appears via [[Blocks administration]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I decide the order in which blocks are docked?==&lt;br /&gt;
Blocks are &amp;quot;docked&amp;quot;, from top to bottom (usually on the left) in the order in which you dock them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I add a block to all user profile pages?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[User profiles]] for instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent users from adding blocks to their My home page?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[My home]] for instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The blocks have disappeared from the front page/course page!==&lt;br /&gt;
This can sometimes be caused by users pasting from Microsoft Word which corrupts the formatting. See this forum post for more details https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=217390#p958884&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Help, I accidentally hid the administration block without realising the consequences!==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://yourmoodlesite.org/admin/blocks.php&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Unhide the settings block by clicking the closed eye icon opposite it&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I accidentally deleted the navigation (or administration) block!==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Blocks &amp;gt; Manage blocks&#039;&#039; (or via the URL &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://yourmoodlesite.org/admin/blocks.php&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;) and unprotect the navigation block by clicking the padlock icon&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on in any course&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the front page and use the &#039;Add a block&#039; dropdown menu to add a navigation block there, setting it to display throughout the entire site&lt;br /&gt;
# Go back to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Blocks &amp;gt; Manage blocks&#039;&#039; and re-protect the navigation block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above method works the same for the navigation and administration blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My Administration block links don&#039;t expand!==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This has been noticed as a Javascript problem. Given the many possible factors behind this issue, a clear-cut solution hasn&#039;t been found. Please try to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Use another browser or use another version of the same browser (try both, lower and higher versions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2. [[Purge all cache]] (Administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Purge all caches): [http://yoursite.com/admin/purgecaches.php yoursite.com/admin/purgecaches.php]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;3. Change the Use slash arguments option --[[HTTP]]-- (Administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; HTTP): [http://yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=http yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=http]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;4. Try different settings at the [[AJAX and Javascript settings]] page (Administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; AJAX and Javascript): [http://yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=ajax yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=ajax]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enabling the Use online YUI libraries (&#039;&#039;useexternalyui&#039;&#039;) sometimes has solved the problem (see [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-31678 tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-31678]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. [http://www.enable-javascript.com/ Turn off Javascript] in your browser (the site shows how to enable Javascript, so do the opposite)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. [http://www.java.com/en/download/help/disable_browser.xml Turn off Java] (you should have it disabled anyway, unless you really need it)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;7. Try using another theme: [http://yoursite.com/theme/index.php yoursite.com/theme/index.php]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should also:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;1 Enable [[Debugging]] (Administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Debugging): [http://yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=debugging yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=debugging]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Check if your browser is showing some warning or error indications (watch the status bar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For advice, see  this forum thread https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=166994 or this one https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=200243. For more details, please see this tracker MDL-31678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I add a Twitter feed block?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An HTML block can be used to display the latest tweets from any Twitter account. See [[HTML block]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=2121 Blocks forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=195874 More problems with &amp;quot;Sticky&amp;quot; blocks in 2.2] with instructions on how to make blocks appear on all course pages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Block_FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Blocks_FAQ&amp;diff=107776</id>
		<title>Blocks FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Blocks_FAQ&amp;diff=107776"/>
		<updated>2014-03-21T12:28:00Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Blocks}}&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I hide front page blocks from non-logged-in users?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Turn editing on&amp;quot; button at the top-right of the front page. (You need to be logged in as an administrator.)&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the assign roles icon (often a face and mask) in the header of the block to be hidden. (&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE&#039;&#039;&#039;: Don&#039;t worry if you get an error message saying you are not able to assign roles ;) )&lt;br /&gt;
# Scroll down to the settings block and click the Permissions link&lt;br /&gt;
# [[File:Blockassign.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
# In the &#039;&#039;View block&#039;&#039; section, click the X next to &#039;&#039;Guest&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I get rid of a link in &amp;quot;Site Pages&amp;quot; in the Navigation block?==&lt;br /&gt;
When a resource or activity (like a page, file or forum) is added to the [[Main menu block]]  on the front page, it will appear in the Site Pages of the Navigation block. If you need the item but don&#039;t want it to display then go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Appearance&amp;gt;Navigation&#039;&#039; and uncheck &amp;quot;show front page activities in the navigation&amp;quot;. If you no longer want the item then turn on the editing on the front page, go to or add the [[Main menu block]] and click to delete the item.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I make a front page block visible to teachers but not students?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to control who sees block on the front page. The following applies to any specified group of people, not just teachers and students.&lt;br /&gt;
# Ensure you have hidden your block  from non-logged in users as  in the instructions above.&lt;br /&gt;
# In  &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles&#039;&#039;, click on &amp;quot;authenticated user on the front page&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
# In the context type, select &amp;quot;block&amp;quot; &lt;br /&gt;
# Set &#039;&#039;moodle/block:view&#039;&#039; to &amp;quot;allow&amp;quot;. Save the changes.&lt;br /&gt;
#Turn editing on on your front page.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;assign roles &amp;quot; icon on your block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the blue words of &amp;quot;authenticated user on the front page&amp;quot; to access the screen where you can choose who you want to allow to see this block (such as your teachers) by moving them from the right hand box to the left.&lt;br /&gt;
#Now click &amp;quot;Permissions&amp;quot; in the Administration block.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the X next to &amp;quot;authenticated user&amp;quot; to prevent them viewing this block.&lt;br /&gt;
#From now on, regular authenticated users will not be able to see the block. However, those who have been given the role of &amp;quot;authenticated user on the front page&amp;quot; will be able to see it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I make a block in my course visible to teachers but not students?==&lt;br /&gt;
Here are two suggestions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1.Add a block to a page which only teachers can see, for example &#039;&#039;/grade/report/grader/index.php&#039;&#039; You could add a comments block for teachers to discuss and moderate each others&#039; grades. Alternatively,you could add an HTML block to  &#039;&#039;/badges/index.php&#039;&#039; with badge issuing policies.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2.Add a block to the main course page and ask your administrator to go to &#039;&#039;Block&amp;gt;Assign roles&amp;gt;Permissions&#039;&#039; and prevent authenticated users and students from viewing the block. (A regular teacher cannot change permissions of authenticated users.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change a Block item name from a list inside a block?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can change an item name in  &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site Administration &amp;gt; Language&amp;gt; Language customization&#039;&#039; Select the &#039;moodle.php&#039; file then search for the words you need to alter.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How to I make a block &amp;quot;sticky&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Block settings]]. Using the edit icon in the block heading, go to the configuration page.  Look for the &amp;quot;Where this block appears&amp;quot; group and &amp;quot;Display on page types&amp;quot;.  Depending upon your current context and permissions, you will see different options.  One maybe &amp;quot;All pages&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Any type of course main page&amp;quot;, and others.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Where did that block come from?  I do not want it!==&lt;br /&gt;
Your site administrator or some one with more permissions than you decided that block should be there. It is possible to force a block to appear on other pages.  For example, a site administrator my force a HTML block on every main course page and determine where it will be, so they may put site messages there.   &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Your site administrator can tell where every instance of a block appears via [[Blocks administration]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I decide the order in which blocks are docked?==&lt;br /&gt;
Blocks are &amp;quot;docked&amp;quot;, from top to bottom (usually on the left) in the order in which you dock them.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I add a block to all user profile pages?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[User profiles]] for instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent users from adding blocks to their My home page?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[My home]] for instructions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The blocks have disappeared from the front page/course page!==&lt;br /&gt;
This can sometimes be caused by users pasting from Microsoft Word which corrupts the formatting. See this forum post for more details https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=217390#p958884&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Help, I accidentally hid the administration block without realising the consequences!==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://yourmoodlesite.org/admin/blocks.php&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;&lt;br /&gt;
# Unhide the settings block by clicking the closed eye icon opposite it&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I accidentally deleted the navigation (or administration) block!==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Blocks &amp;gt; Manage blocks&#039;&#039; (or via the URL &amp;lt;nowiki&amp;gt;http://yourmoodlesite.org/admin/blocks.php&amp;lt;/nowiki&amp;gt;) and unprotect the navigation block by clicking the padlock icon&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on in any course&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to the front page and use the &#039;Add a block&#039; dropdown menu to add a navigation block there, setting it to display throughout the entire site&lt;br /&gt;
# Go back to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Blocks &amp;gt; Manage blocks&#039;&#039; and re-protect the navigation block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above method works the same for the navigation and administration blocks.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My Administration block links don&#039;t expand!==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This has been noticed as a Javascript problem. Given the many possible factors behind this issue, a clear-cut solution hasn&#039;t been found. Please try to:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
1. Use another browser or use another version of the same browser (try both, lower and higher versions).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;2. [[Purge all cache]] (Administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Purge all caches): [http://yoursite.com/admin/purgecaches.php yoursite.com/admin/purgecaches.php]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;3. Change the Use slash arguments option --[[HTTP]]-- (Administration &amp;gt; Server &amp;gt; HTTP): [http://yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=http yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=http]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;4. Try different settings at the [[AJAX and Javascript settings]] page (Administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; AJAX and Javascript): [http://yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=ajax yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=ajax]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Enabling the Use online YUI libraries (&#039;&#039;useexternalyui&#039;&#039;) sometimes has solved the problem (see [http://tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-31678 tracker.moodle.org/browse/MDL-31678]).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5. [http://www.enable-javascript.com/ Turn off Javascript] in your browser (the site shows how to enable Javascript, so do the opposite)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. [http://www.java.com/en/download/help/disable_browser.xml Turn off Java] (you should have it disabled anyway, unless you really need it)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;7. Try using another theme: [http://yoursite.com/theme/index.php yoursite.com/theme/index.php]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You should also:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;1 Enable [[Debugging]] (Administration &amp;gt; Development &amp;gt; Debugging): [http://yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=debugging yoursite.com/admin/settings.php?section=debugging]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
2. Check if your browser is showing some warning or error indications (watch the status bar).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For advice, see  this forum thread https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=166994 or this one https://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=200243. For more details, please see this tracker MDL-31678.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I add a Twitter feed block?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An HTML block can be used to display the latest tweets from any Twitter account. See [[HTML block]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=2121 Blocks forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=195874 More problems with &amp;quot;Sticky&amp;quot; blocks in 2.2] with instructions on how to make blocks appear on all course pages&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Block_FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=My_home&amp;diff=107775</id>
		<title>My home</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=My_home&amp;diff=107775"/>
		<updated>2014-03-21T11:48:55Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: changed Settings to Administration&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Site appearance}}&lt;br /&gt;
==My home==&lt;br /&gt;
My home is a customisable &amp;quot;dashboard&amp;quot; page for providing users with links to their courses and activities within them, such as unread forum posts and upcoming assignments.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
My home usually has the [[Course overview block]] in the central column. Users can customize their My home page and add and remove blocks by clicking the &#039;Customise this page&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{| &lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:My home.png|thumb|My home]]&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:Customising my home.png|thumb|Customising My home]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The navigation block includes a My home link directly above or below the Site home link. Once a regular user is logged in, the My courses link will also take them to their My home page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Default home page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can set My home as the default home page for all logged-in users by selecting &#039;My home&#039; as default home page in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Navigation&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If &#039;User preference&#039; is selected as default home page, each user needs to navigate to either the &#039;Home Page&#039; or the &#039;My home&#039; page then via the &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; My profile settings&#039;&#039; click the &amp;quot;Make this my default home page&amp;quot; link. Note that this option only appears on the page that is not their current default home page.  Once selected, Moodle will remember which page to present them each time they log on.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users with the Site administrator role cannot set My home as their default home page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Setting the default My home page for new users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator or manager (or other user with the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/my:configsyspages|moodle/my:configsyspages]]) can set which content (course overview, calendar, blocks) appears on the My home page for new users as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Access &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Default My home page&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Select the required blocks from the &amp;quot;Add a block&amp;quot; drop-down menu. [[Block settings|Configure]] each block as desired&lt;br /&gt;
# Reposition blocks using the arrow icons in the block headers&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Adding a block to the My home page for all users==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
An administrator can add a new block to the My home page for all existing users (not only new users) as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Turn editing on for the front page&lt;br /&gt;
# Add the block to the front page&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit where the block appears and set the page contexts to &#039;Display throughout the entire site&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to your My home page and again edit where the block appears and set &#039;Display on page types&#039; to &#039;My home page&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing users from customizing their My home page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, users can customize their My home page and add blocks. An admin can prevent this as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the authenticated user role and untick the [[Capabilities/moodle/my:manageblocks|Manage My home page blocks capability]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My Moodle capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/my:manageblocks|Manage My home page blocks]] (see above)&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Capabilities/moodle/my:configsyspages|Configure system templates for My home pages]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In addition, all blocks which may be added to a My home page have a &#039;&#039;myaddinstance&#039;&#039; capability (e.g. [[Capabilities/block/comments:myaddinstance|block/comments:myaddinstance]]) for controlling whether a user with a particular role can add the block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Preventing users from adding a block to their My home page==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, users can add many blocks to their My home page. An admin can prevent them from adding a particular block, such as the [[Online users block]], as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
# Edit the authenticated user role and untick the [[Capabilities/block/online users:myaddinstance|Add a new online users block to the My home page capability]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Blocks not available on My home==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following blocks may not be added to a user&#039;s My home page (because it wouldn&#039;t make sense):&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course completion status block]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course/site summary block]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Self completion block]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=un_pBYkeXXI My Home in Moodle 2.0 video]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=168292 Latest news on My Moodle]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Nire_Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:Mon Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Meine Startseite]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Comments&amp;diff=107774</id>
		<title>Comments</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Comments&amp;diff=107774"/>
		<updated>2014-03-21T11:45:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: changed Settings to Administration&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{More features}}&lt;br /&gt;
A [[Comments block|comments block]] can be added to any page in Moodle, enabling users to easily add comments. A similar interface enables comments to be added to glossary, database activity and blog entries. The comments interface uses AJAX so that comments are added instantly without needing a page refresh.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Comments block.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Enabling comments==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Comments can be disabled/enabled by an administrator in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Advanced features&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Blog comments==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Blog comments are enabled by default. The feature may be disabled in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Blog&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Comments report==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A list of all comments added may be found in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Reports &amp;gt; Comments&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Commentsreport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Comments capabilities==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/comment:delete|Delete comments]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/comment:post|Post comments]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/moodle/comment:view|View comments]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/data:comment|Add comments to a database activity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/data:managecomments|Manage comments in a database activity]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/glossary:comment|Add comments to glossary entries]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/glossary:managecomments|Manage comments in a glossary]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/wiki:editcomment|Add comments to pages in a wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/wiki:managecomment|Manage comments in a wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Capabilities/mod/wiki:viewcomment|View comments in a wiki]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Comments FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
* MDL-23605 (Dis)allowing users to create Comments block on their profile&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Comments]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Report]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[eu:Iruzkinak_2.0]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kommentare]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Installations_30000_plus&amp;diff=107773</id>
		<title>Installations 30000 plus</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Installations_30000_plus&amp;diff=107773"/>
		<updated>2014-03-21T11:23:48Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: /* United Kingdom */&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Template:Large Installations}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Austria==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Federal Ministry of Education - [http://www.eduhi.at/ education highway]: [http://www.edumoodle.at Free Moodle for Austrian schools.]&lt;br /&gt;
(Nov/2009)&lt;br /&gt;
 - 26.000 courses&lt;br /&gt;
 - 230.000 users&lt;br /&gt;
 - 1.711 schools&lt;br /&gt;
 - 2 hosting centers, about 15 servers, shared moodle sources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Brazil==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.eadesaf.serpro.gov.br Escola de Administração Fazendária - ESAF] &lt;br /&gt;
Hospeda mais de 1.770 cursos, com 69.883 Estudantes e 1.869 Tutores (em 01/08/2010), atendendo a vários segmentos do serviço público do Brasil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://aprender.unb.br Universidade de Brasília] - 66,587 users (04/30/2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://ead.mackenzie.br/mackenzievirtual/ Universidade Presbiteriana Mackenzie] - 43,237 users (25/06/2009)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Italy==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://elearning.uniroma1.it/ InfoSapienza - University of Rome La Sapienza] InfoSapienza&#039;s Moodle hosts more than 700 courses for about 48.000 students from about 25 faculties, ranging from enginering scientific courses to literature and medicine. (April, 9th 2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.aulaweb.unige.it/ AulaWeb - University of Genoa] AulaWeb is an university-wide installation of Moodle, organized in virtual instances, one for each laurea degree. In July 2013, it has over 34000 users, 1670 courses and 20 sites (in virtual hosting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Norway==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.laerdal.com Laerdal Medical] Laerdal Medical has set up two Moodle installations for The Norwegian Resuscitation Council and The Swedish Resuscitation Council respectively. Together we now host 102 000 users in 5 different courses in the area of Resuscitation and Acute Care. It is estimated that by the end of 2013 the sites will have close to 200 000 users. (October, 17th 2012)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Saudi Arabia==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://computerworld.co.nz/news.nsf/news/catalyst-delivers-major-saudi-arabian-training-project NCEL] - the Saudi Arabian National Centre for E-learning and Distance Learning, an agency established by the Saudi Arabian government runs a Moodle site with 2 million users supported by the Moodle Partner [http://catalyst.net.nz/node/23540 Catalyst IT]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==South Africa==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.liberty.co.za Liberty Life] in Johannesburg runs an instance of Moodle as its institutional LMS, the Wealth Learning University, with 41,000+ registered users as of January 2012. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Spain==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ehu.es Universidad del Pais Vasco - Euskal Herriko Unibertsitatea (UPV/EHU)]: . 34.000 users and 1.650 teachers (different) in aprox. 3.650 courses. Our University have 50.000 students, 3.500 teachers. We started with Moodle 1.6 (four years ago) as a test pilot project for a small number of courses. Currently we are using version 1.9 (since 2009, February) with LDAP authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Taiwan==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.mcu.edu.tw Ming Chuan University]&lt;br /&gt;
 - More then 63,000 users&lt;br /&gt;
 - 33,000 users login in one day(Max)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==United Kingdom==&lt;br /&gt;
* The UK&#039;s [http://www.open.ac.uk/ Open University], a world leading institution and innovator in distance learning based in Milton Keynes, Buckinghamshire is one of the world&#039;s largest Moodle users with over 100,000 students on their main installation, and two other public Moodles: http://www.open.edu/openlearnworks/ and https://learn5.open.ac.uk/&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==United States==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.sfsu.edu San Francisco State University (SFSU)] - 89,543 users (02/07/2008). Among these 89K users, about 35,430 users are considered as currently active.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.umn.edu/moodle University of Minnesota (UofM)]&lt;br /&gt;
** 121,613 user accounts with around 11,000 course sites on production server&lt;br /&gt;
** 50,307 unique users enrolled into 2,886 academic course sites in Spring 2011&lt;br /&gt;
** More stats: http://umn.edu/moodle/about/statistics.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.pcsb.org Pinellas County Schools] - 71,864 registered users who have logged in and created profiles. Over 9,000 course sites that are used for everything from K12 virtual instruction to teacher professional development.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Installations_30000_plus&amp;diff=107772</id>
		<title>Installations 30000 plus</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Installations_30000_plus&amp;diff=107772"/>
		<updated>2014-03-21T10:23:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Template:Large Installations}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Austria==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Federal Ministry of Education - [http://www.eduhi.at/ education highway]: [http://www.edumoodle.at Free Moodle for Austrian schools.]&lt;br /&gt;
(Nov/2009)&lt;br /&gt;
 - 26.000 courses&lt;br /&gt;
 - 230.000 users&lt;br /&gt;
 - 1.711 schools&lt;br /&gt;
 - 2 hosting centers, about 15 servers, shared moodle sources&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Brazil==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [https://moodle.eadesaf.serpro.gov.br Escola de Administração Fazendária - ESAF] &lt;br /&gt;
Hospeda mais de 1.770 cursos, com 69.883 Estudantes e 1.869 Tutores (em 01/08/2010), atendendo a vários segmentos do serviço público do Brasil.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://aprender.unb.br Universidade de Brasília] - 66,587 users (04/30/2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://ead.mackenzie.br/mackenzievirtual/ Universidade Presbiteriana Mackenzie] - 43,237 users (25/06/2009)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Italy==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://elearning.uniroma1.it/ InfoSapienza - University of Rome La Sapienza] InfoSapienza&#039;s Moodle hosts more than 700 courses for about 48.000 students from about 25 faculties, ranging from enginering scientific courses to literature and medicine. (April, 9th 2009)&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.aulaweb.unige.it/ AulaWeb - University of Genoa] AulaWeb is an university-wide installation of Moodle, organized in virtual instances, one for each laurea degree. In July 2013, it has over 34000 users, 1670 courses and 20 sites (in virtual hosting).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Norway==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.laerdal.com Laerdal Medical] Laerdal Medical has set up two Moodle installations for The Norwegian Resuscitation Council and The Swedish Resuscitation Council respectively. Together we now host 102 000 users in 5 different courses in the area of Resuscitation and Acute Care. It is estimated that by the end of 2013 the sites will have close to 200 000 users. (October, 17th 2012)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Saudi Arabia==&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://computerworld.co.nz/news.nsf/news/catalyst-delivers-major-saudi-arabian-training-project NCEL] - the Saudi Arabian National Centre for E-learning and Distance Learning, an agency established by the Saudi Arabian government runs a Moodle site with 2 million users supported by the Moodle Partner [http://catalyst.net.nz/node/23540 Catalyst IT]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==South Africa==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.liberty.co.za Liberty Life] in Johannesburg runs an instance of Moodle as its institutional LMS, the Wealth Learning University, with 41,000+ registered users as of January 2012. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Spain==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.ehu.es Universidad del Pais Vasco - Euskal Herriko Unibertsitatea (UPV/EHU)]: . 34.000 users and 1.650 teachers (different) in aprox. 3.650 courses. Our University have 50.000 students, 3.500 teachers. We started with Moodle 1.6 (four years ago) as a test pilot project for a small number of courses. Currently we are using version 1.9 (since 2009, February) with LDAP authentication.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Taiwan==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.mcu.edu.tw Ming Chuan University]&lt;br /&gt;
 - More then 63,000 users&lt;br /&gt;
 - 33,000 users login in one day(Max)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==United Kingdom==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* The UK&#039;s [http://www.open.ac.uk/ Open University], a world leading institution and innovator in distance learning based in Milton Keynes, Buckinghamshire, England is one of the world&#039;s largest Moodle installations with over 100,000 users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==United States==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.sfsu.edu San Francisco State University (SFSU)] - 89,543 users (02/07/2008). Among these 89K users, about 35,430 users are considered as currently active.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://www.umn.edu/moodle University of Minnesota (UofM)]&lt;br /&gt;
** 121,613 user accounts with around 11,000 course sites on production server&lt;br /&gt;
** 50,307 unique users enrolled into 2,886 academic course sites in Spring 2011&lt;br /&gt;
** More stats: http://umn.edu/moodle/about/statistics.html&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.pcsb.org Pinellas County Schools] - 71,864 registered users who have logged in and created profiles. Over 9,000 course sites that are used for everything from K12 virtual instruction to teacher professional development.&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Comments_FAQ&amp;diff=107771</id>
		<title>Comments FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Comments_FAQ&amp;diff=107771"/>
		<updated>2014-03-21T09:13:31Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Comments}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==If comments are enabled on my site how can I moderate them?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is a site wide report that admins can access from &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site Administration&amp;gt;Reports&amp;gt;Comments&#039;&#039;. Unsuitable comments can be seen and deleted from there.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Commentsreport.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I decide how many comments to display in my course/block?==&lt;br /&gt;
Currently the number of comments displayed is set by the administrator in &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Front page&amp;gt;Front page settings&#039;&#039; and so it is not possible to set this at course/block level. See MDL-25332&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kommentare FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Kommentare FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:Comentarios FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Advanced_grading_methods&amp;diff=107768</id>
		<title>Advanced grading methods</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Advanced_grading_methods&amp;diff=107768"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T12:07:56Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grades}}&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced grading methods&#039;&#039;&#039; enable various assessment forms to be used for calculating grades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:comicstrip-rubrics.png|600px|They should also have plagiarism plugins installed and apply them to control lazy course content creators.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Advanced grading method types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rubrics]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Marking guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Learning Analytics Enriched Rubric]] (new plugin since Moodle 2.3)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basic concepts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, numerical grades in Moodle are selected by the teacher from a range like 0-100. When advanced grading methods are enabled, the grade selection element is replaced with a more complex assessment form provided by the plugin. The plugin contains the logic how to calculate the grade. Such a calculated grade is then passed back to the activity module as if the teacher used the standard grade value selector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039; The teacher creates new Assignment in the course with the grade up to 30. She defines a rubric to be used for grading. The rubric itself produces raw score up to 12 (eg it has four criteria with levels 0, 1, 2, 3). So the rubric&#039;s score 12 leads to the assignment grade 30, the score 6 leads to the grade 15 etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each activity, a new copy of the assessment form is created. Note that this is different from how [[Scales|scales]] work. While scales are defined at the site level or course level and then can be used in all activities, advanced grading forms create a new copy of the form definition for every single activity that uses it. So a change in the form definition in one assignment does not affect other places where the same rubric is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039; The teacher defines a rubric for an assignment in the course. Then she re-uses the rubric in another assignment (see below on how to do this). When the teacher modifies the rubric in the second assignment, the first assignment still uses the original rubric.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grading form definition is part of the activity data. It is included in the activity&#039;s backup and it is copied when the activity is duplicated via the &amp;quot;x2&amp;quot; icon or imported from another course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring an activity module to use advanced grading methods ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:grading-method-selection-modform.png|thumb|right|Choosing the grading method in the activity settings form.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modules that support advanced grading methods have the grading method selector included in their settings form (for example in the [[Assignment settings]] form). The teacher can choose either &#039;Simple direct grading&#039; or one of the installed grading methods plugins. Selecting &#039;Simple direct grading&#039; means that the advanced grading is not used and the standard grade selector is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative way is to follow the link &#039;Advanced grading&#039; in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Activity administration&#039;&#039;. The link leads to a page where the current active grading method can be changed, too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form definition and the associated assessment data are stashed when the grading method is changed from one type to another. That means it is safe to change the current active grading method from &#039;Rubric&#039; to &#039;Simple direct grading&#039; and back to &#039;Rubric&#039;. The rubric definition is kept in the database, although it may not be available while the current grading method is set to some other method.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assessment form definition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:grading-manage-initial.png|thumb|right|Grading method management screen (no assessment form of the selected type is not defined yet).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The link &#039;Advance grading&#039; in the activity settings form leads to a management screen where the assessment form can be defined, edited, deleted and eventually shared as a public template (if the user has such permission). If there is no form of the selected method defined yet, there are two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Define new grading form from scratch - creates a blank grading form and lets you define it. Each grading plugin provides its own grading form editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* Create new grading form from a template - lets you re-use a previously defined form. You can copy any of your own grading forms (that is those you have created elsewhere) or a grading form that was shared as a public template at your site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every grading form has a name and a description. These are not displayed to students. The description should summarize the form, explain its usage etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grading form definition can be saved as a draft or as a final version. If the grading form is saved as a draft, it can&#039;t be used for assessing. To release the form and make it available to assessment, save it using the button &#039;Save and make it ready&#039;. The current status of the form definition is indicated via a tag displayed next to the form name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modifying the form after it has been used ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that you define a grading form, make it ready for usage and start assessing students with it. After some time you realize there is a typo in the form or that it should be actually improved significantly (like by adding another criterion into the rubric). In such case, you are about to edit a form that has already been used for assessment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the grading plugin considers your change as significant, it may force you to mark all current assessment with a special flag &#039;Needs review&#039;. It is your duty to go through all existing assessments made by the previous version of the form and re-assess them to make the calculated grades valid a comparable. If the change seems to be a trivial change (eg fixing a typo in the text), the form editor may ask you to decide whether the existing assessment should be marked with the &#039;Needs review&#039; flag or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, when there are other people using the form for assessment (eg there are several non-editing teachers in the course who participate on the submissions assessment), even a trivial rewording can be understood as significant change in the criterion meaning. Make sure you communicate the changes well with your colleagues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Re-using assessment forms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:grading-pick-search.png|thumb|right|Searching for a grading form to re-use]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of defining the new grading form from scratch, you can use some existing form as the initial template to create it from. When clicking the &#039;Create new grading form from a template&#039; icon, a new page opens and you can search for a grading form there. Simply type words that should appear somewhere in the form name, its description or the form body itself. To search for a phrase, wrap the whole query in double quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shared templates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users who were given a special permission can save their grading forms as shared templates on the site. Such forms can be then picked and re-used by all teachers in their courses. Users who published the form as a template can also delete it from the list of shared templates. See [[Grading forms publisher]] for  more information. There is also another permission to manage the whole &amp;quot;bank&amp;quot; of shared template. Users with this permission can delete any shared template, even if they are not the authors of it. See [[Grading forms manager]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grading forms can be shared at the site level only. There is no way how to share forms at lower context levels (eg at the course category level as the question bank does).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Re-using own forms without sharing them ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:grading-pick-ownform.png|thumb|right|Re-using a form that was previously used in another activity]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only the grading forms that have been saved as shared templates are included in the search results. You can also include all your own grading forms in the search results. This way, you can simply re-use your grading forms without sharing them. Only forms marked as &#039;Ready for usage&#039; can be re-used this way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Permissions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two capabilities that affect the user&#039;s permission to work with templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Share advanced grading form as a template ([[Capabilities/moodle/grade:sharegradingforms|moodle/grade:sharegradingforms]]) - grants the ability to save a grading form as a new shared template and eventually edit and remove own templates (templates originally shared by that user). Users with the role of manager are given this permission by default. To allow others to do this, see [[Grading forms publisher]].&lt;br /&gt;
* Manage advanced grading form templates ([[Capabilities/moodle/grade:managesharedforms|moodle/grade:managesharedforms]]) - grants the ability to edit and remove any shared template, even those originally shared by other users. To allow trusted teachers to do this, see [[Grading forms manager]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sharing your grading forms world-wide ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the moment, there is no way how to export/import grading form definitions. The known workaround is to create an empty assignment module and attach the grading form to it. Then make a standard activity backup of this assignment in the MBZ format and share it. By restoring the assignment, the attached grading form is restored, too. It can be then picked for your own activities or shared as a template at your site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What the students see==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When students click on an assignment which has a rubric or marking guide attached to it, they will see the rubric or marking guide as part of the information about their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:rubricbeforesubmission.png|thumb|Student view of rubric before submission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The future of advanced grading methods==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Advanced grading methods can currently only be used for [[Assignment module|assignments]]. In future Moodle versions it is hoped that they can be used in more activity modules, such as glossaries and database activities. In addition more grading methods can be implemented as independent plugins (including custom ones fitting your particular need).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=193460 A few Advanced Grading questions for Moodle 2.2.1]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=193961 Wrong Gradebook Calculation from 2.2 Rubric]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Erweiterte Bewertungsmethoden]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Advanced_grading_methods&amp;diff=107767</id>
		<title>Advanced grading methods</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Advanced_grading_methods&amp;diff=107767"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T12:07:10Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Grades}}&#039;&#039;&#039;Advanced grading methods&#039;&#039;&#039; enable various assessment forms to be used for calculating grades.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:comicstrip-rubrics.png|600px|They should also have plagiarism plugins installed and apply them to control lazy course content creators.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Advanced grading method types==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Rubrics]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Marking guide]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Learning Analytics Enriched Rubric]] (new plugin since Moodle 2.3)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Basic concepts ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, numerical grades in Moodle are selected by the teacher from a range like 0-100. When advanced grading methods are enabled, the grade selection element is replaced with a more complex assessment form provided by the plugin. The plugin contains the logic how to calculate the grade. Such a calculated grade is then passed back to the activity module as if the teacher used the standard grade value selector.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039; The teacher creates new Assignment in the course with the grade up to 30. She defines a rubric to be used for grading. The rubric itself produces raw score up to 12 (eg it has four criteria with levels 0, 1, 2, 3). So the rubric&#039;s score 12 leads to the assignment grade 30, the score 6 leads to the grade 15 etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For each activity, a new copy of the assessment form is created. Note that this is different from how [[Scales|scales]] work. While scales are defined at the site level or course level and then can be used in all activities, advanced grading forms create a new copy of the form definition for every single activity that uses it. So a change in the form definition in one assignment does not affect other places where the same rubric is used.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:&#039;&#039;Example:&#039;&#039; The teacher defines a rubric for an assignment in the course. Then she re-uses the rubric in another assignment (see below on how to do this). When the teacher modifies the rubric in the second assignment, the first assignment still uses the original rubric.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grading form definition is part of the activity data. It is included in the activity&#039;s backup and it is copied when the activity is duplicated via the &amp;quot;x2&amp;quot; icon or imported from another course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Configuring an activity module to use advanced grading methods ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:grading-method-selection-modform.png|thumb|right|Choosing the grading method in the activity settings form.]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Modules that support advanced grading methods have the grading method selector included in their settings form (for example in the [[Assignment settings]] form). The teacher can choose either &#039;Simple direct grading&#039; or one of the installed grading methods plugins. Selecting &#039;Simple direct grading&#039; means that the advanced grading is not used and the standard grade selector is displayed.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternative way is to follow the link &#039;Advanced grading&#039; in &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Activity administration&#039;&#039;. The link leads to a page where the current active grading method can be changed, too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The form definition and the associated assessment data are stashed when the grading method is changed from one type to another. That means it is safe to change the current active grading method from &#039;Rubric&#039; to &#039;Simple direct grading&#039; and back to &#039;Rubric&#039;. The rubric definition is kept in the database, although it may not be available while the current grading method is set to some other method.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Assessment form definition ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:grading-manage-initial.png|thumb|right|Grading method management screen (no assessment form of the selected type is not defined yet).]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The link &#039;Advance grading&#039; in the activity settings form leads to a management screen where the assessment form can be defined, edited, deleted and eventually shared as a public template (if the user has such permission). If there is no form of the selected method defined yet, there are two options:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Define new grading form from scratch - creates a blank grading form and lets you define it. Each grading plugin provides its own grading form editor.&lt;br /&gt;
* Create new grading form from a template - lets you re-use a previously defined form. You can copy any of your own grading forms (that is those you have created elsewhere) or a grading form that was shared as a public template at your site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Every grading form has a name and a description. These are not displayed to students. The description should summarize the form, explain its usage etc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The grading form definition can be saved as a draft or as a final version. If the grading form is saved as a draft, it can&#039;t be used for assessing. To release the form and make it available to assessment, save it using the button &#039;Save and make it ready&#039;. The current status of the form definition is indicated via a tag displayed next to the form name.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Modifying the form after it has been used ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It may happen that you define a grading form, make it ready for usage and start assessing students with it. After some time you realize there is a typo in the form or that it should be actually improved significantly (like by adding another criterion into the rubric). In such case, you are about to edit a form that has already been used for assessment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If the grading plugin considers your change as significant, it may force you to mark all current assessment with a special flag &#039;Needs review&#039;. It is your duty to go through all existing assessments made by the previous version of the form and re-assess them to make the calculated grades valid a comparable. If the change seems to be a trivial change (eg fixing a typo in the text), the form editor may ask you to decide whether the existing assessment should be marked with the &#039;Needs review&#039; flag or not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Please note, when there are other people using the form for assessment (eg there are several non-editing teachers in the course who participate on the submissions assessment), even a trivial rewording can be understood as significant change in the criterion meaning. Make sure you communicate the changes well with your colleagues.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Re-using assessment forms ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:grading-pick-search.png|thumb|right|Searching for a grading form to re-use]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Instead of defining the new grading form from scratch, you can use some existing form as the initial template to create it from. When clicking the &#039;Create new grading form from a template&#039; icon, a new page opens and you can search for a grading form there. Simply type words that should appear somewhere in the form name, its description or the form body itself. To search for a phrase, wrap the whole query in double quotes.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Shared templates ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users who were given a special permission can save their grading forms as shared templates on the site. Such forms can be then picked and re-used by all teachers in their courses. Users who published the form as a template can also delete it from the list of shared templates. See [[Grading forms publisher]] for  more information. There is also another permission to manage the whole &amp;quot;bank&amp;quot; of shared template. Users with this permission can delete any shared template, even if they are not the authors of it. See [[Grading forms manager]] for more information.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Grading forms can be shared at the site level only. There is no way how to share forms at lower context levels (eg at the course category level as the question bank does).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Re-using own forms without sharing them ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[image:grading-pick-ownform.png|thumb|right|Re-using a form that was previously used in another activity]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, only the grading forms that have been saved as shared templates are included in the search results. You can also include all your own grading forms in the search results. This way, you can simply re-use your grading forms without sharing them. Only forms marked as &#039;Ready for usage&#039; can be re-used this way.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Permissions ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There are two capabilities that affect the user&#039;s permission to work with templates.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Share advanced grading form as a template ([[Capabilities/moodle/grade:sharegradingforms|moodle/grade:sharegradingforms]]) - grants the ability to save a grading form as a new shared template and eventually edit and remove own templates (templates originally shared by that user). Users with the role of manager are given this permission by default.&lt;br /&gt;
* Manage advanced grading form templates ([[Capabilities/moodle/grade:managesharedforms|moodle/grade:managesharedforms]]) - grants the ability to edit and remove any shared template, even those originally shared by other users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you want to give these permissions to other users (eg to experienced teachers who are known to be able to produce high quality grading forms), ask your site administrator to define new system roles, eg. &#039;Grading forms publisher&#039; and &#039;Grading forms manager&#039;, having the above capabilities granted respectively. Your site admin can then assign these roles to the selected users.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Sharing your grading forms world-wide ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At the moment, there is no way how to export/import grading form definitions. The known workaround is to create an empty assignment module and attach the grading form to it. Then make a standard activity backup of this assignment in the MBZ format and share it. By restoring the assignment, the attached grading form is restored, too. It can be then picked for your own activities or shared as a template at your site.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What the students see==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When students click on an assignment which has a rubric or marking guide attached to it, they will see the rubric or marking guide as part of the information about their assignment.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:rubricbeforesubmission.png|thumb|Student view of rubric before submission]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==The future of advanced grading methods==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Advanced grading methods can currently only be used for [[Assignment module|assignments]]. In future Moodle versions it is hoped that they can be used in more activity modules, such as glossaries and database activities. In addition more grading methods can be implemented as independent plugins (including custom ones fitting your particular need).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=193460 A few Advanced Grading questions for Moodle 2.2.1]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=193961 Wrong Gradebook Calculation from 2.2 Rubric]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Erweiterte Bewertungsmethoden]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Creating_custom_roles&amp;diff=107766</id>
		<title>Creating custom roles</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Creating_custom_roles&amp;diff=107766"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T12:05:12Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copying from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a custom role:&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
#Click the &amp;quot;Add a new role&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
#Give the role a Short name e.g. &#039;Parent&#039;.The short name is necessary for other plugins in Moodle that may need to refer to the role (e.g. when uploading users from a file or setting enrolments via an enrolment plugin).&lt;br /&gt;
#You must provide a full name for all custom roles. If you need to name the role for multiple languages you can use [[Multi language content|multi-lang syntax]] if you wish.&lt;br /&gt;
#Give the role a description (optional).&lt;br /&gt;
#Select an appropriate role archetype (see below for further information).&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the contexts where the role may be assigned e.g. &#039;User&#039; for Parent role.&lt;br /&gt;
#Set permissions as required.&lt;br /&gt;
#Scroll to the top or bottom of the page and click the &amp;quot;Create this role&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:addingnewrole25.png|thumb|Adding a new role and setting context types]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:permissions125.png|thumb|Choose &amp;quot;Allow&amp;quot; where required]]&lt;br /&gt;
| [[Image:permissions225.png|thumb|Extra options with &amp;quot;Show advanced&amp;quot; enabled]]&lt;br /&gt;
|-&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Role archetypes==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A role archetype&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Is a hard-coded template for a role&lt;br /&gt;
* Is used during upgrades when adding defaults for new capabilities - no archetype = no new capabilities during upgrade&lt;br /&gt;
* Is used during when resetting a role to determine the defaults - no archetype = reset removes all capabilities&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
There is no need to set a role archetype for custom roles used for overrides or if the site admin wants to specify new capabilities manually after upgrading.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a duplicate role==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a duplicate role:&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*In the &amp;quot;edit&amp;quot; column on the right, click the  x2 icon.&lt;br /&gt;
*Give a name and set permissions for your new role; scroll down and click &amp;quot;create this role&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
*The list of roles will now show the &amp;quot;... copy 1&amp;quot; at the bottom, for example &amp;quot;Guest copy 1&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==New role considerations==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A newly-created role does not have the ability to assign or override any other roles. This is true even when the new role is a copy of a role that had such abilities.  If such ability is needed, the administrator must grant it explicitly via the &#039;Allow role assignments&#039; and &#039;Allow role overrides&#039; tabs.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A new role is not automatically listed in course descriptions even if was created by copying a role that is listed, such as Teacher. If you want the new role to appear in the course listing, you must set it explicitly via &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Course managers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Testing a new role==&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Switch role to&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
Use the &amp;quot;Switch role to&amp;quot; link to see what another role will see in that context.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Since switching roles confines you to those roles you can assign in a course context, this method is only useful for testing course-scoped capabilities (i.e. it will not be useful for testing permissions that apply outside the course context, like moodle/user:edit).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;Tip:&#039;&#039; You can always create test user and assign the new role to them.  Then logout as admin and login as the test user.  This is really the best way to test a new role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Example custom roles==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Parent role|Parent]] - for providing parents/mentors/tutors with permission to view certain information about their children/mentees/tutees&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Demo teacher role|Demo teacher]] - for providing a demonstration teacher account with a password which can&#039;t be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Forum moderator role|Forum moderator]] - for providing a user with permission in a particular forum to edit or delete forum posts, split discussions and move discussions to other forums&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Calendar editor role|Calendar editor]] - for enabling a user to add site or course events to the calendar&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Blogger role|Blogger]] - for limiting blogging to specific users only&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Quiz user with unlimited time role|Quiz user with unlimited time]] - for allowing a user unlimited time to attempt a quiz which has a time limit set&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Question creator role|Question creator]] - for enabling students to create questions for use in quizzes&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course requester role]] - for restricting users who can make course requests&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cohort enroller]] - for allowing teachers to enrol category cohorts into their course&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Template creator]] - for allowing teachers to save as &amp;quot;Public&amp;quot; a Feedback template.&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grading forms publisher]] for allowing teachers to share Advanced grading forms with others&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grading forms manager]] for allowing teachers to share Advanced grading forms with others and to delete templates others have created.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=66782 What happens if a user has multiple roles in a course?]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=90140 logged in: what role am I?]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Site administration]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Neue Rollen anlegen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:manager.png&amp;diff=107765</id>
		<title>File:manager.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:manager.png&amp;diff=107765"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T12:03:19Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:gradingformcapabilitiesmanager.png&amp;diff=107764</id>
		<title>File:gradingformcapabilitiesmanager.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:gradingformcapabilitiesmanager.png&amp;diff=107764"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T12:00:51Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:gradingformmanager.png&amp;diff=107763</id>
		<title>File:gradingformmanager.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:gradingformmanager.png&amp;diff=107763"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T11:59:45Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grading_forms_manager&amp;diff=107762</id>
		<title>Grading forms manager</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grading_forms_manager&amp;diff=107762"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T11:54:17Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
The custom role of Grading forms manager allows a user to share advanced grading forms (such as rubrics) as a template for others to use. It also allows them to edit and remove templates others have shared as well as their own. &#039;&#039;(If you only wish a user to share and manage their own templates, and not those others have created, then see the custom role [[Grading forms publisher]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new role==&lt;br /&gt;
#As an administrator, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles&#039;&#039; and  click the &#039;Add a new role&#039; button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the next screen, ignore archetypes and presets and click &#039;Continue&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Give the role a name and if desired a description and tick the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; context:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradingformmanager.png|center|thumb|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.In the filter, type &amp;quot;grading form&amp;quot; to quickly display the capabilities of &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:managesharedforms&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:sharegradingforms&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.Set both capabilities to &#039;allow&#039;:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradingformcapabilitiesmanager.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Click the &#039;Create this role&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning the role to a teacher==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#As an administrator, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Assign system roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#You should now see your newly created role here&lt;br /&gt;
#Assign the role to the required course teacher(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Managing templates==&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Assignment administration&amp;gt;Advanced grading&#039;&#039;, a Grading forms manager can create a new form and publish it as a template for others to use:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:publishastemplate.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They also have the option of both using or deleting a shared  template from the bottom of the screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:manager.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Grades]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:publisher.png&amp;diff=107761</id>
		<title>File:publisher.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:publisher.png&amp;diff=107761"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T11:53:21Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:publishastemplate.png&amp;diff=107760</id>
		<title>File:publishastemplate.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:publishastemplate.png&amp;diff=107760"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T11:52:46Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:gradingformcapabilitiespublisher.png&amp;diff=107759</id>
		<title>File:gradingformcapabilitiespublisher.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:gradingformcapabilitiespublisher.png&amp;diff=107759"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T11:51:57Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:gradingformpublisher.png&amp;diff=107758</id>
		<title>File:gradingformpublisher.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:gradingformpublisher.png&amp;diff=107758"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T11:51:09Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grading_forms_publisher&amp;diff=107757</id>
		<title>Grading forms publisher</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Grading_forms_publisher&amp;diff=107757"/>
		<updated>2014-03-20T11:50:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
The custom role of Grading forms publisher allows a user to share advanced grading forms (such as rubrics) as a template for others to use. They can also edit and remove their own templates. &#039;&#039;(If you want a user to be able to edit and remove templates created by other users as well as their own, then see the custom role, [[Grading forms manager]])&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Creating a new role==&lt;br /&gt;
#As an administrator, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles&#039;&#039; and  click the &#039;Add a new role&#039; button at the bottom of the screen.&lt;br /&gt;
#On the next screen, ignore archetypes and presets and click &#039;Continue&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Give the role a name and if desired a description and tick the &amp;quot;System&amp;quot; context:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradingformpublisher.png|center|thumb|600px]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
4.In the filter, type &amp;quot;grading form&amp;quot; to quickly display the capabilities of &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:managesharedforms&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:sharegradingforms&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
5.Set &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:sharegradingforms&#039;&#039; to &#039;allow&#039; but leave &#039;&#039;moodle/grade:managesharedforms&#039;&#039; as default &#039;not set&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:gradingformcapabilitiespublisher.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
6. Click the &#039;Create this role&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Assigning the role to a teacher==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#As an administrator, go to &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Assign system roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#You should now see your newly created role here&lt;br /&gt;
#Assign the role to the required course teacher(s).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Sharing and using other templates==&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Assignment administration&amp;gt;Advanced grading&#039;&#039;, a Grading forms publisher can save a new form and then publish as a template for others:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:publishastemplate.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
They can also create a new form from a shared template by selecting &#039;Use this template&#039; at the bottom of the screen:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:publisher.png|center]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:Grades]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Roles_FAQ&amp;diff=107755</id>
		<title>Roles FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Roles_FAQ&amp;diff=107755"/>
		<updated>2014-03-17T17:02:37Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Roles}}&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the definition of a...==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
;Capability&lt;br /&gt;
:A configurable aspect of program behavior. Moodle has 100s of capabilities.   Each capability has a computer friendly name like [[Capabilities/mod/forum:rate|mod/forum:rate]] and a human-friendly name like &amp;quot;Rate posts.&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
;Permission&lt;br /&gt;
:Permissions are paired with each  capability.  There are four possible permission values: &#039;&#039;Allow&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Prevent&#039;&#039;, &#039;&#039;Prohibit&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;Not set&#039;&#039;/&#039;&#039;Inherit&#039;&#039;. (It is called not-set when defining roles and inherit when overriding permissions.)&lt;br /&gt;
;Role&lt;br /&gt;
:A named set of permissions that are associated with each capability. For example. the &amp;quot;Teacher&amp;quot; and &amp;quot;Student&amp;quot; roles come with the standard Moodle install.&lt;br /&gt;
;Context&lt;br /&gt;
:A functional area of Moodle. Contexts have a hierarchy.  Examples of contexts include a course, activity module, or resource.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why isn&#039;t my role change taking effect?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Certain capabilities e.g. [[Capabilities/moodle/user:changeownpassword|moodle/user:changeownpassword]] may only be applied in the system context, so giving such permissions by assigning a role in the course context will have no effect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why do some users I know are in my course not appear in &#039;&#039;Participants&#039;&#039;?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Users assigned roles in a higher context, for example users assigned the role of teacher in the course category are technically not enrolled in the course and so will not appear in the Participants link in the [[Navigation block]] but can be found via &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Course administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Other users&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent a user from changing their own password?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To prevent a user from changing their own password, you must make sure they do not have [[Capabilities/moodle/user:changeownpassword|moodle/user:changeownpassword]] = Allow in the System context. The Authenticated user role (which is assigned to users in the System context) has moodle/user:changeownpassword = Allow by default, so you have two choices: &lt;br /&gt;
# Edit Authenticated user, setting moodle/user:changeownpassword = Not set &lt;br /&gt;
# Create a new role CannotChangeOwnPassword with moodle/user:changeownpassword = Prevent and all other permissions Not set. Choose &amp;quot;system&amp;quot; for the context type  and assign the role to selected users in the System context  via &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration -&amp;gt; Users -&amp;gt; Permissions -&amp;gt; Assign system roles).&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choice (1) will prevent &#039;&#039;all&#039;&#039; users from changing their passwords (except for the administrator, who can do anything).  To selectively allow selected users (say teachers) to change their passwords, you could create a new role CanChangeOwnPassword with moodle/user:changeownpassword = Allow and all other permissions not set and assign the role to selected users in the System context (Site administration -&amp;gt; Users -&amp;gt; Permissions -&amp;gt; Assign system roles).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Choice (2) allows you to be selective, but if you have a lot of users that you want to prevent (say, all students), you will have to make a lot of role assignments in the System context.  There is currently no convenient way to do this, so you might consider choice (1).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that you MUST deal with this permission in the System context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent a user from editing their own profile?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See [[Roles_FAQ#How can I prevent a user from changing their own password? | How can I prevent a user from changing their own password?]]  The answer to this question is the same if you substitute &#039;&#039;edit their own profile&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;change their own password&#039;&#039; and &#039;&#039;[[Capabilities/moodle/user:editownprofile|moodle/user:editownprofile]]&#039;&#039; for &#039;&#039;moodle/user:changeownpassword.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I change the name for &amp;quot;teacher&amp;quot; in the course description?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Either&lt;br /&gt;
* Edit the role of Teacher via &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039; and rename it. The new name will apply site-wide.&lt;br /&gt;
Or&lt;br /&gt;
* Create a duplicate teacher role with an alternative name and assign users the duplicate teacher role as appropriate in the course context. In &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Appearance &amp;gt; Course contact&#039;&#039; select the alternative name for teacher that you wish to be displayed in the course description when courses are listed. For example, copy the standard teacher role and call it Instructor and only show that role as the course contact.&lt;br /&gt;
Or&lt;br /&gt;
* Create a new &amp;quot;dummy&amp;quot; role (no capabilities) with those names and assign them to teachers along with the real roles. select the alternative name for teacher that you wish to be displayed in the course description when courses are listed.  For example, copy the guest role, call it Lead Teacher and make this the course contact.  You may have 5 teachers in the course but only one name will appear as Lead Teacher.   If nobody is assigned the role Lead Teacher, no course contact will show.&lt;br /&gt;
Or&lt;br /&gt;
*Names for different roles in a course may be changed in the [[Course settings|Course administration &amp;gt; edit settings]] &amp;quot;Role renaming&amp;quot; fields.  For example, some courses the teacher wants the title &amp;quot;Professor&amp;quot;, or &amp;quot;Chief&amp;quot; or &amp;quot;Mentor&amp;quot;.  &lt;br /&gt;
Or&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Language customization|Edit the language files]] and change any word you want.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable teachers to set role overrides?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Access &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the teacher role and change the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/role:safeoverride|moodle/role:safeoverride]] to allow.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the tab &amp;quot;Allow role overrides&amp;quot; (in &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;).&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the appropriate box(s) in the teacher row to set which role(s) teachers can override. Most likely it will just be the student role (you don&#039;t want teachers to be able to override admins!), so check the box where the teacher row intersects with the student column.&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable teachers to assign other teachers in a course?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is disabled by default but it can be switched on by modifying the teacher&#039;s role. In &#039;&#039;Siite administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039; select the &amp;quot;Allow role assignments&amp;quot; tab and tick the checkbox where Teacher and Teacher intersect.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why doesn&#039;t &amp;quot;Switch role to..&amp;quot; within a course seem to work properly?==&lt;br /&gt;
This feature is intended for teachers so that they can see how their course appears for students. It isn&#039;t a reliable view however, as some features do not display correctly when viewed by a teacher who has switched their role to a student. Certain actions (specifically submitting assignments) are excluded from working with &#039;switch roles&#039; (as the submitted work would not be visible on the grading pages, due to the user not having the &#039;submit&#039; permission when they have not switched roles).For that reason  it is always preferable where possible to have a &amp;quot;test&amp;quot; student log in to use.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Are there any example roles?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Yes, as follows:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Parent role|Parent]] - for providing parents/mentors/tutors with permission to view certain information about their children/mentees/tutees&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Demo teacher role|Demo teacher]] - for providing a demonstration teacher account with a password which can&#039;t be changed&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Forum moderator role|Forum moderator]] - for providing a user with permission in a particular forum to edit or delete forum posts, split discussions and move discussions to other forums&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Calendar editor role|Calendar editor]] - for providing a user with permission to add site events to the calendar&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Blogger role|Blogger]] - for limiting blogging to specific users only&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Question creator role|Question creator]] - for enabling students to create questions for use in quizzes&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Course requester role]] - for restricting users who can make course requests&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Cohort enroller]] -for allowing teachers in courses to enrol cohorts&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable logged-in users to participate in front page activities?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Either:&lt;br /&gt;
#Access &#039;&#039;Site administration &amp;gt; Front Page &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions&amp;gt; Assigned roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Select the role you wish to add individual users to&lt;br /&gt;
#Select all or some of the users in the potential users list&lt;br /&gt;
#Use the left-facing arrow button to add them to the existing users list&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Or:&lt;br /&gt;
#Access &#039;&#039;Site Administration &amp;gt; Front Page &amp;gt; Front Page settings&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Set the default front page role to student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
:Note: Setting the default front page role to student is not sufficient to enable logged-in users to participate in a Front Page &amp;quot;Choice activity&amp;quot;. A permissions override should be used instead.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I prevent students from editing their profile?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
If you only want students to be prevented from editing their profile, and not all users, you can create a new role, such as Restricted user as described in the [[Demo teacher role]], with moodle/user:editownprofile set to prevent, and assign it to all students in the system context.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Alternatively, you could change moodle/user:editownprofile to not set for the [[Authenticated user role]], then create a new role for teachers with moodle/user:editownprofile set to allow.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can&#039;t I add teachers or students site wide in Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
You can, but it is not best practice.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Teachers and students typically work in one or more individual courses. It is unusual for a student to be studying every single course on your Moodle and unusual for a teacher to be teaching every single course. Therefore, the default Moodle does use these as system wide roles.  The Manager role might be one that makes sense to assign on a system or category context.&lt;br /&gt;
#To assign a teacher or student sitewide, go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Define roles&#039;&#039; and edit the role to include the &#039;&#039;system&#039;&#039; context. &lt;br /&gt;
#Then search for and allow the capability [[Capabilities/moodle/course:view|moodle/course:view]]&lt;br /&gt;
#Then assign users to this role via &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Users&amp;gt;Permissions&amp;gt;Assign system roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*It might be preferable to create a new role based on the teacher or student and assign this in the System context.  Then assign individuals to that role.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I make a role available as a front page role?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039; and edit the role&lt;br /&gt;
# For &#039;Context types where this role may be assigned&#039; tick the Course checkbox&lt;br /&gt;
# Scroll to the bottom of the page and click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I allow a non-editing teacher to &amp;quot;switch role to &amp;quot; a student?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;, edit the non-editing teacher role and set the capability &amp;quot;moodle/role:switchroles&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;allow&amp;quot;. This will then allow them to switch their role to a student or a guest (as defined on the &#039;&#039;Allow role switches&#039;&#039; screen.)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I set a role back to its default permissions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039; and click on the name of the role&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Reset to defaults&#039; button and then answer yes to confirm&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Note that if you have students  who have been given extra permissions (such as forum ratings), then they will no longer be able to do this once the role has been reset to its default.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Permissions don&#039;t seem to be working correctly. What can I do?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:reviewing badge permissions.png|thumb|Reviewing role permissions]]It is recommended that permissions for each role are reviewed and set according to the role archetype.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
# Go to &#039;&#039;Administration &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039; and click the edit icon opposite a role&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Show advanced&#039; button to reveal the different permission settings&lt;br /&gt;
# Review permissions (filtering for particular permissions as appropriate) and, unless there is a good reason to do otherwise, change permissions so that all are set to the highlighted value&lt;br /&gt;
# Click the &#039;Save changes&#039; button&lt;br /&gt;
# Repeat steps 1 to 4 for each role&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==What is the &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; role?==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to enrol users into a course so they appear as participants, but since they do not have a standard role such as student, they do not have any particular permissions. They cannot for example, engage in course activities. For discussion about the &amp;quot;none&amp;quot; role, see MDL-29599&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== See also ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=6826 Roles and Capabilities forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Rollen FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:FAQ_roles]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ des rôles]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[ja:ロールFAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Feedback_FAQ&amp;diff=107753</id>
		<title>Feedback FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Feedback_FAQ&amp;diff=107753"/>
		<updated>2014-03-12T13:55:41Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Feedback}}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I allow non-logged in users to give feedback?==&lt;br /&gt;
*As an adminstrator, go to &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site Administration&amp;gt;Plugins&amp;gt;Activity Modules&amp;gt;Feedback&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
*Change &amp;quot;Allow full anonymous&amp;quot; to &amp;quot;yes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
*Note that this only works for the front page, and NOT for courses with guest access.&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Anonymousfeedback.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I create a Feedback activity and add questions?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* From the &#039;&#039;Add an activity...&#039;&#039; drop down, select &#039;&#039;Feedback&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
* Complete the Name, Description, and other options then save.&lt;br /&gt;
* To add questions to your Feedback activity, click the link for the feedback activity, click the &#039;&#039;Edit questions&#039;&#039; tab, and add questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a teacher make a feedback template public for use elsewhere?==&lt;br /&gt;
*See [[Template creator]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Can I make a question dependent on the response from a previous question?==&lt;br /&gt;
Yes. See the section on Dependence item and Dependence value in [[Building Feedback]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==I do not see the Edit Questions tab. What should I do?==&lt;br /&gt;
This does happen sometimes. Usually, logging out of the course and then logging back in will take care of this problem.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=7152 Feedback module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Feedback FAQ]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:dependence2.png&amp;diff=107752</id>
		<title>File:dependence2.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:dependence2.png&amp;diff=107752"/>
		<updated>2014-03-12T13:53:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:dependence1.png&amp;diff=107751</id>
		<title>File:dependence1.png</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=File:dependence1.png&amp;diff=107751"/>
		<updated>2014-03-12T13:53:15Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Building_Feedback&amp;diff=107750</id>
		<title>Building Feedback</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Building_Feedback&amp;diff=107750"/>
		<updated>2014-03-12T13:52:49Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Feedback}}&lt;br /&gt;
After setting a new Feedback you design it by &#039;&#039;&#039;adding questions&#039;&#039;&#039;. Select the type of question from the drop down list and then click the &#039;&#039;Add question to activity&#039;&#039; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Image:Feedbackeditquestions.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Standard options ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The following apply to all or most question types.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Position ===&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
This number controls the order of the questions. Position 1 is the question nearest the top of the page, so when you create or edit a question, you can choose from the dropdown of available positions (which will vary depending on how many other questions there are). You can also rearrange questions by clicking the position up and down arrows on the main add questions screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Required ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
These questions are required to be answered and will prompt the user if they are left unaswered. These questions are highlighted with a red star for users, and have a yellow exclamation point beside them when editing Feedback questions.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
== Available question types ==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Captcha===&lt;br /&gt;
A test to make sure a real person is filling in the form and not an automatic spamming program of some sort. Asks a person to write out some distorted text which is displayed on screen. You normally won&#039;t need this unless you find you are getting spammed a lot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Information===&lt;br /&gt;
This allows you to choose to display one of three types of information: the time of responding; the course and/ or the category where the feedback is located.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Label ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Like a standard Moodle label, this allows you to add abritrary text between questions allowing for extra explanation or to divide the Feedback into sections.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Longer Text Answer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option is for creating a text box (you specify how big it will appear in rows and columns) which people can write a long answer into.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple choice - multiple answers ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will give you a series of options with a checkbox next to each one. The respondent can check as many as they want and there is currently no way to specify a limit to how many they can choose which is lower than the total.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple choice - single answer allowed (dropdownlist) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will give you a dropdown list from which only one answer can be selected&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Dropdownlist (rated) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is similar to the dropdownlist option, except that each option has a numerical value associated with it. This means that if asking a question like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How much do you enjoy being in class?&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* I love it&lt;br /&gt;
* I like it&lt;br /&gt;
* It&#039;s OK&lt;br /&gt;
* I don&#039;t like it&lt;br /&gt;
* I hate it&lt;br /&gt;
it&#039;s not possible to (easily) get out an &amp;quot;average&amp;quot; score - particularly if you&#039;re asking the same question before and after an event or course. If the Dropdownlist (rated) option is used, then numerical values are associated with each option, allowing an average or other measurements of any responses. The above question might look like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;How much do you enjoy being in class?&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
* [5] I love it&lt;br /&gt;
* [4] I like it&lt;br /&gt;
* [3] It&#039;s OK&lt;br /&gt;
* [2] I don&#039;t like it&lt;br /&gt;
* [1] I hate it&lt;br /&gt;
which might allow for an average (e.g. &amp;quot;4.5 this term, up from 3.9 last term&amp;quot;) to be calculated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Numeric answer ===&lt;br /&gt;
Here, you ask a question which must have a number as an answer and specify the acceptable range e.g. &amp;quot;How many arms would you like, if more than 2 were possible? (please specify 0-10)&amp;quot; with a range of 0-10 set in the options. It helps if you specify the acceptable range in the question text.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple choice - single answer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This will give you a series of radio buttons, which starts on &#039;Not selected&#039; and then has your options afterwards. Only one can be chosen and &#039;Not selected&#039; is a valid answer if the question is not set to &#039;required&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Multiple Choice (Rated) ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This is similar to the other multiple choice options, except that each option has a numerical value associated with it. You have the choice of using radio buttons or a drop-down list to display the answers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For example:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;How much do you enjoy being in class?&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;I love it&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;I like it&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;It&#039;s OK&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;I don&#039;t like it&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;I hate it&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s not possible to (easily) get out an &amp;quot;average&amp;quot; score - particularly if you&#039;re asking the same question before and after an event or course. If the Drop-down List (rated) option is used, then numerical values are associated with each option, allowing an average or other measurements of any responses.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The above question might look like:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
::&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;How much do you enjoy being in class?&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;[5] I love it&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;[4] I like it&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;[3] Its OK&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;[2] I don&#039;t like it&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
::*&#039;&#039;[1] I hate it&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Which might allow for an average (e.g. &amp;quot;4.5 this term, up from 3.9 last term&amp;quot;) to be calculated.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
=== Short Text Answer ===&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
This option lets you specify a single line answer, with an input box which is a set number of characters long (you choose). You also specify the maximum number of characters you will accept, so that the answer is not too long and/or does not run over the length of the box on screen.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Dependence item and Dependence value==&lt;br /&gt;
It is possible to direct the user to specific questions depending on a previous answer. For example, if they say &#039;Yes&#039; to the question &amp;quot;Do you have a car?&amp;quot; they will be directed to a different question from if they answer &#039;No&#039;. To set dependent questions:&lt;br /&gt;
*Set up your initial question and give it a name in the Label field:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dependence1.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Add a Page break&lt;br /&gt;
*Add the question to go to if (for example)the user replies &#039;Yes&#039;. &lt;br /&gt;
*In &#039;Dependence item&#039;, select the Label of your first question. &lt;br /&gt;
*In &#039;Dependence value&#039; type your dependent answer (such as &#039;Yes&#039; in our example.)&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:dependence2.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
*Follow the same process for the other response (such as &#039;No&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
[[Feedback_templates|Feedback Templates]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Feedback erstellen]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=About_Moodle_FAQ&amp;diff=107749</id>
		<title>About Moodle FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=About_Moodle_FAQ&amp;diff=107749"/>
		<updated>2014-03-12T09:57:40Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: fixing links&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{About Moodle}}&lt;br /&gt;
Below is a list of general questions many educators ask about Moodle. There are also [[:Category:FAQ|Frequently Asked Question page]]s for many specific Moodle tools. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Starting with Moodle==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle is a learning management system (LMS, also called VLE), explained [http://moodle.org/about/ here]. In many ways, Moodle is like Lego, as this [http://www.slideshare.net/moodlefan/what-is-moodle-explained-with-lego-presentation Slideshare presentation] shows.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I start using Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*You can [http://download.moodle.org download] your own copy and install it on your server.  If you want to try it out for yourself you can use one of the accounts on the [http://demo.moodle.net Moodle Demonstration Site].  To see a site with example content, visit the [http://school.demo.moodle.net School Demonstration site].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where do I get it (from)?===&lt;br /&gt;
*You can [http://download.moodle.org download] Moodle in a variety of packages and install it yourself or have a [http://moodle.com/partners/ Moodle Partner] do it for you. Some webhosts offer Moodle as part of their hosting packages, although these vary in reliability. Other webhosts offer Moodle for free but this usually comes with conditions attached; for instance, your site might have adverts on it.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Do I have to be really good with technology to use Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*To use Moodle, you only need the basic web browsing skills. To install it you need a little more knowledge, but guidance is provided. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What age of learners and educational settings is Moodle most appropriate for?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle can be and is successfully used from early years of Primary schools through to the Secondary sector ([[Secondary_education|examples]]) and universities worldwide. Moodle can be adapted to suit learners of all ages in any learning environment, including commercial training.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is Moodle just for online learning?===&lt;br /&gt;
*It can be. However, in most cases Moodle is used to support and combine face-to-face interaction with e-learning, m-learning and other forms of learning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I get some tutorials or presentations about Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*You can see a series of videos introducing you to basic Moodle features on the Moodle HQ Youtube channel: http://www.youtube.com/user/moodlehq&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*As well as the [[Main_page| comprehensive free documentation]] here and the [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=7246 published Moodle books], you can search through a list of [[Moodle_manuals|other manuals and resources]], a selection of  [[Moodle_video_tutorials |video tutorials]]  and general [[Moodle_presentations|presentations]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there any provisions in Moodle for people with disabilities?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Certainly. Moodle supports many assistive technologies such as screen-readers, screen-magnifiers, alternative mouse and key use, disabling of AJAX and Javascript, and more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there any comparisons of Moodle with other Learning Management Systems?===&lt;br /&gt;
*See the [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?id=2784 Comparisons and Advocacy forum] and also [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=19 Moodle buzz]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Navigation and settings==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I login to Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to the right URL (address) of the Moodle site, login with your username and password, or enter as a Guest (if allowed). Most Moodle sites will have a link to set up a new account or request forgotten details of your existing one. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I get around Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Use the Navigation block on the side of your page. From there you can go directly to any part of Moodle you have access to. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I edit things?===&lt;br /&gt;
*You can only edit things you have permission to edit. A regular user such as a student can only edit their [[My home]] page and possibly their [[My_Profile|profile page]]. A user with editing rights such as a teacher can use the   &#039;Turn editing on&#039; button or the link in  the Settings block to edit items. A guest can&#039;t edit anything and an Admin you can whatever they  like.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Who can create and edit activities and other things in courses?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Whoever has the editing capability. Usually, it is the Teacher who creates and edits courses and activities within courses, but this role can be changed, re-named (eg. Facilitator) and given to other people too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there any good examples of Moodle use I can see?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Sure! Check this [http://embedr.com/playlist/moodle-on-the-ground little collection of videos] and flick through stories on [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?d=19 Moodle Buzz]. There is also  an [http://school.demo.moodle.net entire school] full of examples for you to see and play with.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I share ideas and learn from other educators using Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*By participating in many ways, either through events, [http://moodle.org/forums/ forums] on Moodle.org and networks elsewhere.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Are there any good sources for shared courses?===&lt;br /&gt;
*There certainly are. Via [[Community_hub|Community Hubs]] you can search for, enrol in, download and publish, shared courses.. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Learning with Moodle - pedagogy==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is the best way to use Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*There is no one best way to use Moodle. Use of Moodle depends a lot on one&#039;s own educational philosophy, the context where Moodle is used and willingness to experiment and create a little (or a lot!). Moodle can be used by a strict controller using trusted material of 30 years or a free-loving e-hippie exploring new ways of teaching and learning alike.     &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can Moodle be used in different subject (say maths, languages, art, media, science...)?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Yes. Moodle is used in a variety of fields. Users in some subject areas may benefit further from standard or compatible third-party modules and plugins (eg. in maths, [[TeX filter|Tex notation filter]] (standard) or [[DragMath equation editor|DragMath equation editor]] (third-party plugin)).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I use Moodle to stimulate students think harder and ask good questions?===&lt;br /&gt;
*By asking and encouraging good questions students can wrestle with and explore through and with the help of activities, resources in a course. For example, open a forum discussion with a provocative question, start a wiki where groups collaboratively build a solution ... and more! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I communicate with students by using Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Many ways are available. Some examples include: [[Forums]] are great for extended conversations over time, [[Messages]] for private channels, [[Chat]] for synchronous conversations, and [[Comments]] for quick notices and remarks. You can also exchange online feedback with [[Assignment]], comments to [[Blog]] posts ... and more!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can we share resources with Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle offers a number of ways to share content: making files and folders available to course participants, collecting resources of any kind with a Database, attaching files to Forum posts, importing and linking resources to and from external repositories/portfolios ... and more!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can Moodle help people collaborate?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Use different activities like [[Wikis]] to create content together, [[Forums]] and [[Comments]] to exchange ideas, [[Database]] to collectively gather resources, [[Glossary]] to create shared understanding of concepts ... and more! You can [[Groups|group]] students in any of these activities to promote collaboration.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How do I grade in Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Grades]] can be created for each [[Activity|activity]] in a [[Courses|course]] which are then added to the [[Gradebook]].  For example, grades in Assignment (all types), Quiz and Workshop activities are automatically added to Gradebook. In some activities you will have to turn grading on, such as ratings &#039;on&#039; in Forum, Glossary and Database to send them to the Gradebook.  You can also use the gradebook to adjust, assign or automatically scale an activity grade in your course.  For some activities which don&#039;t automatically link to the gradebook, such as [[Chat]] or [[Feedback]], you have to create a new [[Grade items |grade item]] manually. There are many ways you can give feedback to students on their progress in activities without giving them a grade. In [[Assignments]] for example, you can give written feedback.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can students do self and peer assessment type tasks with Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Yes. Probably the best activity to do that is [[Workshop_module|Workshop]] module. Informally, students can evaluate (and even rate) each others&#039; Forum posts, Glossary entries, and Database entries.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is &#039;social constructionist&#039; approach necessary when using Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle has continuously been built with a particular, social constructionist [[Philosophy|philosophy]] in mind. This of course does not prevent people from using Moodle in line with their own preferred view of learning and the purpose they use it for.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Students==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How long does it take students to learn to use Moodle?=== &lt;br /&gt;
*It really does not take a great deal of skill or computer knowledge to use Moodle. With basic web browsing and editing skills, students (and teachers) can use Moodle - instantly! &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What do my students need to know before using Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*They need to know how login into the site and course, and have some basic web browsing and computer skills.  For example, they need to how a mouse and keyboard works, what a link is, maybe how to attach, upload or download a file.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Do students have to be online all the time to use Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle &#039;&#039;&#039;is&#039;&#039;&#039; an online learning management system and at some point you and your students will have to spend some time in front of a computer. How much time depends  on what you use Moodle for. Most Moodle sites are used to mix offline and online learning activities.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Getting help==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is there an official support desk for Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Yes and no. Moodle.org forums can serve as a support desk. [[Moodle_Partners|Moodle Partners]] may charge for support desk as part of their service. Often, like the higher priced LMSs, a school or consortium will maintain a help desk. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What do I do if I am stuck? Are there any good tutorials around?===&lt;br /&gt;
* Get some help at Moodle.org in a [http://moodle.org/forums/ forum] or search the [[Main_Page|Moodle documentation]] There are also many [http://moodle.org/mod/data/view.php?id=7246 books and manuals] available for purchase.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What if I have a specific question about a tool, where can I find out more?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Research it in Moodle documentation by using the search box on the left of every page in Moodle Docs. Click on a help icon on your Moodle site.  Go to a [http://moodle.org/course/view.php?id=5 forum] dedicated to that tool. Research it by using the Search moodle.org box at the top of this page.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How can I suggest improvements and put forward what I would like to see in Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*[http://tracker.moodle.org/ Moodle Tracker] is by far THE best place to suggest improvement. File an issue or suggest improvement there, and let people know in a forum about your ideas. Maybe they will vote for it (which tends to get people&#039;s attention).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Where can I get training on how to use Moodle?=== &lt;br /&gt;
*A number of places offer training in how best to use Moodle. However,  [[Moodle_Partners|Moodle Partners]] know Moodle best and can provide official training. You can also think of doing the [http://moodle.org/course/view.php?id=48 Moodle Course Creator Certificate] to improve your skills.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Basic Moodle jargon==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Moodle uses jargon words that you may be familiar with from other, non-Moodle contexts.  Within Moodle, These words have specific (and potentially different) meanings, explained below.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is a Course?===&lt;br /&gt;
* A course is the basic learning area on Moodle where a teacher displays materials for their students. See [[Courses|Courses]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is a Category?===&lt;br /&gt;
*A [[Category|category]] is a group of things and has several meanings in Moodle.  It can be a [[Add/edit course  categories|grouping of courses]] by a certain criteria (Such as: Science; Junior School; Staff Area).  It can be a [[Question categories|group of questions]], or a [[Using Glossary|group of entries]] in a glossary.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is an Activity?===&lt;br /&gt;
* Usually an [[Activities|activity]] is something that a student will do that interacts with other students and or the teacher. Moodle has over a dozen activity types of tools for a teacher to use in a course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is a Resource?===&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Resources|Resources]] are items that a teacher can use to support learning, such as a file or a link.  A standard Moodle comes with 6 resource types that can be added to a course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is a Block?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Typically,[[Blocks|blocks]] are items which may be added to the left or right in a course&#039;s home page.  There are dozens of different blocks that can be added to a course, or pages within a course.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is a Plugin?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Plugin is an optional extra component which can add functionality to your Moodle. Some standard Moodle plugins need to be turned on by Moodle Administrator. Many more can be downloaded from the [http://moodle.org/plugins/index.php Modules and Plugins database]. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is a Filter?===&lt;br /&gt;
*[[Filters|Filters]] can be used to add links, insert multimedia players, convert Mathematical expressions or emoticons into displayed images.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is a Section?===&lt;br /&gt;
*A section is an area within a [[Course homepage|course&#039;s homepage]] that hold activities and resources. Standard [[Course formats|course section formats]] are topics, weeks, social and SCORM.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What is a Role?===&lt;br /&gt;
*A role in Moodle refers to what a user is allowed (or not) to do on a Moodle site. [[Standard roles|Typical roles]] might include those of a student and teacher.  A role is a collection of [[Roles and permissions|permissions]] that can be assigned to specific users in specific [[Context|contexts]]. For example, when a user is enrolled in a course as a student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Security==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How secure is Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle is designed to be very secure. However, a lot depends upon the webserver, the way Moodle is setup and regular updates of the package by the Moodle Administrator.&lt;br /&gt;
  &lt;br /&gt;
===Can Moodle get hacked into and student data stolen?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Highly unlikely if your Moodle site has up-to-date security and the site administrator has not given away the keys. Anything is possible on any website, but Moodle makes it difficult for nasty people to cause havoc.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===What if I did something wrong and accidentally broke it - could it be easily fixed?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle can be backed-up at any point. If a backup was made 5 minutes before you broke it, chances are it can be fixed easily.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Is my student data safe on a cheap or free webhost?===&lt;br /&gt;
*While you do have some control of the security of a Moodle site on a free or cheap web host, the question is: How much do you trust your web host?&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I track and search what people do and post in Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Assuming you are a teacher and it is your course, yes. Moodle Admin can do that for the entire site.&lt;br /&gt;
   &lt;br /&gt;
===Can I backup Moodle so I don&#039;t lose things?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Yes, you can backup a Moodle site or as a teacher you can back up your course and download it (if your role permits it). With appropriate permissions, you can restore your course and/or import parts of courses elsewhere on your site or beyond. This can be particularly useful with [[Community_hub|Community Hubs]] (Moodle 2.0 feature).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Technical==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Do I need my own server to run Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle needs a web server. There are lots of options.  See [[Moodle Partners]], [[Complete_install_packages_for_Windows| Complete install packages for Windows]] or [[Complete_Install_Packages_for_Mac_OS_X| Complete Install packages for Mac]] and [[Installation FAQ]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Do I have to install Moodle myself?===  &lt;br /&gt;
*You can, guidance provided. Most organisations will have a policy on this and/or someone to perform the installation.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I customise a theme and make it about our school?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Yes, see [[Themes]]. You can customise themes down to a single course. There are many ways to make Moodle looks great too.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Does it matter what computer type or browser I use for Moodle?=== &lt;br /&gt;
*Moodle works well in all standard, modern browsers and different operating systems.   As with any web based application, you should be aware of your audience, their typical bandwidth and web browsers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can you use Moodle from anywhere?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Yes, if it is on a web server attached to the internet and you have a computer, mobile device or tablet.  Or if it is on a web server attached to the same intranet (internal network) as a computers or tablets which need to work it.   And you can even put Moodle on a USB drive.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can access to Moodle be restricted to just our school?=== &lt;br /&gt;
*Yes, several ways to do this. For example, it can be installed on your schools internal network, or limit the IPs to those assigned by your school, or only manually enroll your students are just a few ways.  &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===Can I access Moodle from a mobile device?=== &lt;br /&gt;
*Yes. In Moodle 2.1 you use the [[Mobile app]] for iPhone.  You can set one [[Themes|theme]] as the default but also set another theme for a mobile device and a different one for a tablet.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I&#039;ve come from a school that used a different VLE/LMS. Can I move my stuff over to Moodle?=== &lt;br /&gt;
*Sure. Some VLE/LMS-specific activities may (not) be compatible, but you can zip your content files and unzip them in Moodle. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I spotted a bug in the system. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to [[Tracker]], search if the bug has already been reported and create a new issue if not. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===I have an idea for a feature and/or improvement in Moodle. What do I do?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to [[Tracker]], search if something like your idea has already been noted and worked on and suggest it if not.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Cost==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How much does it cost to download and use Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*By way of its [[Dev:License|GNU General Public License]], Moodle is and will remain free to download and use in any way you like. Consider it free like a &#039;free puppy&#039; that needs care and attention to grow, not free like a &#039;free beer&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How much does it cost to run Moodle?===&lt;br /&gt;
*Nothing to install, use and change. Of course, there are some associated costs if you have your Moodle hosted with someone, and costs associated with maintenance and training in an organisation (like any other software...). But no royalties, fees or user charges. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
===How much does it cost to have Moodle hosted?===&lt;br /&gt;
*There are many options for hosting.  Cost is usually related to services provided and capacity (eg. a university site with 10 000 users will naturally cost more to host and maintain than a small community school). Ask your local [[Moodle_Partners|Moodle Partner]] and keep Moodle going that way too!&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Case for Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
* [[Decision FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Was ist Moodle FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[es:FAQ acerca de Moodle]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ sur Moodle]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Secondary_education&amp;diff=107748</id>
		<title>Secondary education</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Secondary_education&amp;diff=107748"/>
		<updated>2014-03-12T09:55:24Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: &lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Frequent uses in Primary education can be extended in late childhood/adolescent years particularly with social, collaborative learning features like forums, wikis, glossaries, blogs and more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this stage, teachers often streamline submission of assignments, post feedback, grades. Many creative educators begin to encourage peer evaluation through ratings, design of projects in Groups, even editing of roles and permissions, thus adding responsibility for courses and individual activities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.newportvideo.net/play.php?vid=354 Implementing Moodle] - A video about how Cynffig Comprehensive School implemented Moodle and how they use it and plan to use it in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BgSkE1K9g_E What can Moodle do for you] - short clip by Mary Cooch on use of Moodle in primary &amp;amp; secondary setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z9XfwBzt1mY Moodle in the classroom] - Molly Tipton talks about using Moodle in her 8th grade social studies class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XjLukDNtf3k&amp;amp;feature=related How can Moodle change a school] - 2-part video about gradual implementation, acceptance, and creative use of Moodle in a secondary school.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://eduleader.org/grapevine/?p=272 HCC COWS - From school planning to planning school]  - Roger Pryor describes the fantastic COWS: Moodle-powered district-wide Collaborative Online Workspaces. The phrase &amp;quot;from school planning to planning school&amp;quot; itself is telling that this is a great initiative. Check out the Moodle Cows &amp;amp; Moodle Sandbox !&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.thestclairtimes.com/view/full_story/6899262/article-Springville-students-use--Moodle--for-21st-century-learning Students use Moodle for 21st century learning] - When Springville High School Principal Robert Harris went to a national dropout prevention workshop two years ago, he had no inkling that the ideas he gained from one session would take him on a journey that would help lead his students into true 21st Century learning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.post-gazette.com/pg/10126/1055876-59.stm#ixzz0nrdgFKRl Technology brings Moodle, wiki pages to class in Franklin Regional] - A case of Moodle as a valuable tool in bridging the gap between tech savvy kids and their teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://thejournal.com/articles/2010/12/06/virtual-schools-adopt-moodle-based-lms.aspx Virtual Schools Adopt Moodle] - The state-run virtual schooling programs in South Carolina and Utah have adopted learning management systems based on the open source Moodle platform.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.wickedlocal.com/medford/news/x1946669812/Medford-teachers-continue-to-Moodle Medford teachers continue to Moodle] - A panel of teachers and administrators gave school officials a taste of the online learning initiatives that currently exist in the Medford Public Schools.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://auburnjournal.com/detail/157479.html?content_source=&amp;amp;category_id=2&amp;amp;search_filter=&amp;amp;user_id=&amp;amp;event_mode=&amp;amp;event_ts_from=&amp;amp;event_ts_to=&amp;amp;list_type=&amp;amp;order_by=&amp;amp;order_sort=&amp;amp;content_class=1&amp;amp;sub_type=&amp;amp;town_id= High school from home] - A new program at Maidu High School in Auburn offers students an option to go to class without coming to school. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://presspubs.com/articles/2010/05/20/st_croix_valley_press/news/doc4bf47f1332c42142845753.txt Teachers describe new technology tools in schools] - Making course content accessible online and providing immediate feedback to help students greatly benefits staff and students in this cluster of St Croix Valley high schools. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.explorarium.de/projektueberblick.html Using Moodle for constructive learning in Berlin (Germany) schools] - The &amp;quot;eXplorarium&amp;quot;-project brings Moodle and active, constructive learning to children, young people and teachers of schools (K-12) in Berlin, mainly in disadvantaged areas. Look at the video and visit the website, which takes you also to news about moodle and the project-showroom. (in German)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Useful links==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Secondary_education&amp;diff=107747</id>
		<title>Secondary education</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Secondary_education&amp;diff=107747"/>
		<updated>2014-03-12T09:54:36Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: fixing link&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;Frequent uses in Primary education can be extended in late childhood/adolescent years particularly with social, collaborative learning features like forums, wikis, glossaries, blogs and more. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
At this stage, teachers often streamline submission of assignments, post feedback, grades. Many creative educators begin to encourage peer evaluation through ratings, design of projects in Groups, even editing of roles and permissions, thus adding responsibility for courses and individual activities. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Examples==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.newportvideo.net/play.php?vid=354 Implementing Moodle] - A video about how Cynffig Comprehensive School implemented Moodle and how they use it and plan to use it in the future. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=BgSkE1K9g_E What can Moodle do for you] - short clip by Mary Cooch on use of Moodle in primary &amp;amp; secondary setting.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Z9XfwBzt1mY Moodle in the classroom] - Molly Tipton talks about using Moodle in her 8th grade social studies class.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XjLukDNtf3k&amp;amp;feature=related How can Moodle change a school] - 2-part video about gradual implementation, acceptance, and creative use of Moodle in a secondary school.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://eduleader.org/grapevine/?p=272 HCC COWS - From school planning to planning school]  - Roger Pryor describes the fantastic COWS: Moodle-powered district-wide Collaborative Online Workspaces. The phrase &amp;quot;from school planning to planning school&amp;quot; itself is telling that this is a great initiative. Check out the Moodle Cows &amp;amp; Moodle Sandbox !&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://vle.olchs.lancs.sch.uk/file.php/1890/MOODLEATOLCHS.pdf Moodling at Our Lady&#039;s] - Pupils and staff at Our Lady&#039;s Catholic High School Preston Lancashire UK love using Moodle and encouraging others to do the same. The link is to a case study newsletter for parents and the local community showcasing the school&#039;s use of Moodle.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.thestclairtimes.com/view/full_story/6899262/article-Springville-students-use--Moodle--for-21st-century-learning Students use Moodle for 21st century learning] - When Springville High School Principal Robert Harris went to a national dropout prevention workshop two years ago, he had no inkling that the ideas he gained from one session would take him on a journey that would help lead his students into true 21st Century learning.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.post-gazette.com/pg/10126/1055876-59.stm#ixzz0nrdgFKRl Technology brings Moodle, wiki pages to class in Franklin Regional] - A case of Moodle as a valuable tool in bridging the gap between tech savvy kids and their teachers.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://thejournal.com/articles/2010/12/06/virtual-schools-adopt-moodle-based-lms.aspx Virtual Schools Adopt Moodle] - The state-run virtual schooling programs in South Carolina and Utah have adopted learning management systems based on the open source Moodle platform.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.wickedlocal.com/medford/news/x1946669812/Medford-teachers-continue-to-Moodle Medford teachers continue to Moodle] - A panel of teachers and administrators gave school officials a taste of the online learning initiatives that currently exist in the Medford Public Schools.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://auburnjournal.com/detail/157479.html?content_source=&amp;amp;category_id=2&amp;amp;search_filter=&amp;amp;user_id=&amp;amp;event_mode=&amp;amp;event_ts_from=&amp;amp;event_ts_to=&amp;amp;list_type=&amp;amp;order_by=&amp;amp;order_sort=&amp;amp;content_class=1&amp;amp;sub_type=&amp;amp;town_id= High school from home] - A new program at Maidu High School in Auburn offers students an option to go to class without coming to school. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://presspubs.com/articles/2010/05/20/st_croix_valley_press/news/doc4bf47f1332c42142845753.txt Teachers describe new technology tools in schools] - Making course content accessible online and providing immediate feedback to help students greatly benefits staff and students in this cluster of St Croix Valley high schools. &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[http://www.explorarium.de/projektueberblick.html Using Moodle for constructive learning in Berlin (Germany) schools] - The &amp;quot;eXplorarium&amp;quot;-project brings Moodle and active, constructive learning to children, young people and teachers of schools (K-12) in Berlin, mainly in disadvantaged areas. Look at the video and visit the website, which takes you also to news about moodle and the project-showroom. (in German)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Useful links==&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
	<entry>
		<id>https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Forum_FAQ&amp;diff=107746</id>
		<title>Forum FAQ</title>
		<link rel="alternate" type="text/html" href="https://docs.moodle.org/25/en/index.php?title=Forum_FAQ&amp;diff=107746"/>
		<updated>2014-03-11T11:50:50Z</updated>

		<summary type="html">&lt;p&gt;Marycooch: copied from 2.6 docs&lt;/p&gt;
&lt;hr /&gt;
&lt;div&gt;{{Forum}}&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are students unable to post in the forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most likely reason is that the forum is a [[News forum]] i.e. a special forum for general announcements which is automatically created for each course, and which by default only teachers and administrators can post in.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
To create a standard forum in which students can post, turn editing on for the course, click the &#039;Add an activity or resource&#039; link and then choose Forum.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Students may also be unable to post to a forum where a [[Forum_settings#Common_module_settings|Group Mode]] other than &#039;No Groups&#039; has been used but the student is not a member of any group in the course.  They will see the message &amp;quot;Adding discussions to this forum requires group membership&amp;quot;.  In this case, either add the student to a [[Groups|group]] or change the [[Forum_settings#Common_module_settings|Group Mode]] to &#039;No Groups&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable students to rate forum posts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039; click the + symbol opposite the capability to rate posts and allow the role of student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can I not get ratings to work on my forums?==&lt;br /&gt;
Assuming you have followed the instructions above correctly and still cannot see ratings, then check you have json support enabled on your server. You can see this in &#039;&#039;Settings&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Server&amp;gt;PHP info.&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:Json.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
See also this discussion:[ http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=170563]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I create a teacher-only forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher/tutor-only forum may be added to a course by creating a hidden forum. Teachers are able to view hidden course activities whereas students cannot.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==My users can&#039;t add attachments to my forum, either with drag and drop or with the file picker.==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Check that in the forum settings that you have changed the maximum number of attachments allowed to a number greater than 0 ;)&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove the news forum from a course?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the news forum from the course homepage.&lt;br /&gt;
#In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Course administration &amp;gt; Edit settings&#039;&#039; set &amp;quot;News items to show&amp;quot; to 0.&lt;br /&gt;
#Delete the Latest news block.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove test messages from a new forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
There are several options ([http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=95470 Here is a nice graphic]).  Remember you can &lt;br /&gt;
*Move the discussion/thread to another forum&lt;br /&gt;
*Edit the post with your moderator powers&lt;br /&gt;
*Delete the post with your moderator powers&lt;br /&gt;
*Split the thread at a particular post and move it to another thread &lt;br /&gt;
*Split&amp;gt;move&amp;gt;delete your test messages.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I set a display period for news forum announcements?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Timed posts are disabled by default, but the feature can be enabled by checking the &#039;&#039;forum_enabletimedposts&#039;&#039; checkbox in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039;. Timed posts can then be created by users with the [[Capabilities/mod/forum:viewhiddentimedposts|capability to view hidden timed posts]] (normally managers and teachers).&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why are email copies of forum posts not being sent?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
The most likely reason is that the cron is not set up. Please refer to the [[Cron|cron instructions]].&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Tips:&lt;br /&gt;
* Try the default settings in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Message outputs &amp;gt; Email&#039;&#039;. This generally works.&lt;br /&gt;
*Make sure that &#039;Allow user to select character set&#039; in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Message outputs &amp;gt; Email&#039;&#039; is set to No.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==Why can&#039;t students in separate groups reply to a forum discussion started by a teacher?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
When using groups, teachers are given the option of adding a new discussion topic for all participants or for a selected group. To enable students in separate groups to reply to a discussion, the teacher must copy and paste their discussion topic for each separate group, selecting each group from the dropdown menu at the top left of the forum page before clicking the &amp;quot;Add a new discussion topic&amp;quot; button.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How do I enable guests to post in a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
It&#039;s not possible to enable guests to post in a forum, though there is a workaround. Please see the section &#039;Guests and posting in a forum&#039; in [[Forum settings]] for details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I close/archive a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
*You might want to do this if, for example, you want to put an end to a student discussion topic but still want them to be able to see posts which had been made without being able to reply any more.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*In &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Permissions&#039;&#039; click the Prevent icon (X) for the student role for the capabilites &#039;Start new discussions&#039; and &#039;Reply to posts&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
{|&lt;br /&gt;
|[[File:forum-permissions-page1.gif|thumb|The screen and relevant capabilities. (Click to enlarge]]&lt;br /&gt;
|}&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&#039;NOTE:&#039;&#039;&#039; If you are a teacher in a course, you should be able to do this by default, but if you don&#039;t see these options, ask your admin to do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
#Go to &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site Administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
#Edit the teacher role and change the capability moodle/role:safeoverride to allow&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the tab &amp;quot;Allow role overrides&amp;quot; (in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Users &amp;gt; Permissions &amp;gt; Define roles&#039;&#039;)&lt;br /&gt;
#Check the appropriate box(s) in the teacher row to set which role(s) they can override. Most likely it will just be the student role, so check the box where the teacher row intersects with the student column&lt;br /&gt;
#Click the button &amp;quot;Save changes&amp;quot;&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I quarantine a forum post?==&lt;br /&gt;
If a student makes an inappropriate post, rather than deleting it, you can &amp;quot;quarantine&amp;quot; it by sending it to a hidden forum and then alerting your superior and the child&#039;s guardians. To do this you first need to create a forum &amp;quot;Hidden forum for Offensive Posts&amp;quot; (for example) and hide it with its eye.&lt;br /&gt;
**Find the offensive post and click &#039;split&#039; (between &#039;edit&#039; and &#039;delete&#039;) &lt;br /&gt;
**This will take you to a second page where you will be asked to verify the split. Confirm it by pressing the &#039;split&#039; button near the top of the page. &lt;br /&gt;
**The post(s) will now be split. You should see the post/discussion individually on a separate page. In the right-hand corner will be a dropdown bar and a button that says &#039;move.&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
**Choose &#039;Hidden Forum for Offensive Posts&#039; in the dropdown and click &#039;move.&#039; &lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Make sure you inform the child why their post has been quarantined, as well as your superior and the child&#039;s guardians.&lt;br /&gt;
&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
(with thanks to Ben Reynolds)&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
 &lt;br /&gt;
==Can I subscribe to just one discussion in a forum?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Not at present, though please see MDL-1626.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I receive forum emails in digest form?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A daily digest of either complete forum posts or with subjects only can be enabled in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; My profile settings &amp;gt; Edit profile&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I allow students to add new questions in a Q &amp;amp; A forum type?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Only teachers and managers by default see the &amp;quot;add  a new question&amp;quot; button. If you wish students to be able to add new questions, they need to be given the capability [[Capabilities/mod/forum:addquestion|mod/forum:addquestion]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I make sure my students are notified of forum posts?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
For students to be notified of forum posts, they need to be &#039;&#039;subscribed&#039;&#039; to the forum. A teacher can choose to force subscription on a particular forum either initially (auto subscription) or permanently (forced subscription) using the subscription mode setting. See the section on subscription mode in [[Forum settings]] for further details.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
A teacher can also subscribe selected students to the forum via &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Forum administration &amp;gt; Show/edit current subscribers&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I change the &#039;From&#039; address for forum notifications sent via email?==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
By default, a user&#039;s email is set as the &#039;From&#039; address for forum notifications (unless the user has hidden their email address in their profile) so that recipients can choose to reply personally rather than via the forum. To set noreply@yourmoodlesite.org as &#039;From&#039; address for all forum notification emails, untick the forum_replytouser checkbox in &#039;&#039;Settings &amp;gt; Site administration &amp;gt; Plugins &amp;gt; Activity modules &amp;gt; Forum&#039;&#039;.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can I remove the words &amp;quot;Site news&amp;quot;?==&lt;br /&gt;
You can change the words to something else from &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Forum administration&amp;gt;Edit settings&#039;&#039; but to have no words at all - and without touching the code - do the following:&lt;br /&gt;
*As admin go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Site administration&amp;gt;Appearance&amp;gt;HTML settings&#039;&#039; and uncheck/untick &#039;&#039;Remove HTML tags from all activity names&#039;&#039;&lt;br /&gt;
*Go to &#039;&#039;Administration&amp;gt;Forum administration&amp;lt;Edit settings&#039;&#039; (for the site news) and type:&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:sitenewsname.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
*Save. What this does is code a space into the name field so Moodle thinks there is something in the required field -  but that something is a space,  not words.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a teacher see all of a student&#039;s forum posts in a course?==&lt;br /&gt;
If a teacher clicks on the profile of a particular student, for example via the Participants link, they can then access a link &#039;&#039;Forum posts&#039;&#039; from the Navigation block. Expanding this link will offer the option either to see all posts or any discussions started by that student.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:studentforumposts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==How can a user see all their forum posts on Moodle?==&lt;br /&gt;
A user can view all their forum posts by going to the Navigation block and clicking &#039;&#039;My profile&amp;gt;Forum posts.&#039;&#039; Expanding this link will offer the option either to see all posts or any discussions started.&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[File:seeallforumposts.png]]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
==See also==&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* Using Moodle [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/view.php?f=116 Forum module forum]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
Using Moodle forum discussions:&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=148055 Ability to post anonymously]&lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=178331 How to resend forum posts] &lt;br /&gt;
* [http://moodle.org/mod/forum/discuss.php?d=196698 Discussion Count]&lt;br /&gt;
&lt;br /&gt;
[[Category:FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[de:Forum FAQ]]&lt;br /&gt;
[[fr:FAQ sur le forum]]&lt;/div&gt;</summary>
		<author><name>Marycooch</name></author>
	</entry>
</feed>